{"title":"Skin Brightening \u0026 Pigmentation Care","description":"\u003cp\u003eGlutathione injectables, brightening boosters and peels used for tone, radiance and pigmentation concerns.\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"bb-glow-21","title":"BB Glow #21","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBB Glow #21\u003c\/strong\u003e is a tinted cosmetic serum in a light shade, made in South Korea under the DM.Cell brand. It is used by beauticians and skin clinics for BB Glow treatments, where a pigmented serum is worked into the top layer of the skin to even out the look of the complexion. Shade #21 is the lightest of the three shades we stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is supplied in single-shade boxes of vials. The vial size and count are as printed on the box. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e on single boxes or mixed shade orders.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBB Glow #21, #23 or #25 — which shade do you need?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose the shade closest to the client's natural skin tone, or one step lighter for a brighter finish. The numbers follow the usual Korean base make-up scale.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBB Glow #21\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/bb-glow-23\"\u003eBB Glow #23\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/bb-glow-25\"\u003eBB Glow #25\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eShade\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDeeper \/ tan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGood fit for\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFair to light skin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLight-medium to medium skin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium to tan skin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMixing\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"3\"\u003eShades can be blended to match in-between tones\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMost salons keep at least two shades so they can blend. If you are new to the treatment, the \u003ca href=\"\/products\/bb-glow-starter-kit\"\u003eBB Glow Starter Kit\u003c\/a\u003e gives you several shades and serum ampoules in one box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is BB Glow #21 made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBB Glow #21 is a light, serum-textured base with cosmetic pigment. The formula lists niacinamide, peptides, hyaluronic acid and plant extracts. Niacinamide is a common brightening ingredient, and hyaluronic acid holds water in the skin. Check the full ingredient list on the box before use, especially for clients with known sensitivities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is BB Glow #21 used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBB Glow is a professional salon treatment, not a home-use make-up product. In a typical session the practitioner:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003col\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCleanses the skin and removes all make-up and oil.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eChooses or blends the shade and patch-tests if needed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApplies the serum in small sections and works it in with a microneedling pen or nano cartridge, following the manufacturer's instructions for depth and passes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLeaves the remaining serum on the skin and finishes with a calming product.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlways follow the instructions supplied with the product and the rules for microneedling in your country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow long does the BB Glow effect last?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe result is temporary and builds over a course. Salons commonly plan 3 to 5 sessions, spaced about one to two weeks apart, with top-ups as the tint fades. How long it holds depends on skin type, sun exposure and home care.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should BB Glow #21 be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore unopened vials in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight. Use an opened vial promptly and do not share one vial between clients. The expiry date is printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying BB Glow #21 from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to beauty professionals, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you place the order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e or browse more \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/peels-skincare\"\u003eprofessional peels and skin care\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use by trained practitioners only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBB Glow #21 FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat skin tone is BB Glow #21 for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFair to light skin tones. It is the lightest of the three shades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I mix #21 with #23?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Practitioners often blend two shades to match a client's tone.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs BB Glow an injectable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a cosmetic serum applied to the skin surface during a professional treatment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many sessions are usual?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSalons commonly plan 3 to 5 sessions, about one to two weeks apart.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order mixed shades?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with the shades and quantities you need.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46868241482010,"sku":null,"price":195.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/BBGlow_21.jpg?v=1695951191"},{"product_id":"bb-glow-23","title":"BB Glow #23","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBB Glow #23\u003c\/strong\u003e is a tinted cosmetic serum in a medium shade, made in South Korea under the DM.Cell brand. Beauticians and skin clinics use it for BB Glow treatments, where a pigmented serum is worked into the top layer of the skin to even out the look of the complexion. Shade #23 sits in the middle of the three shades we stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is supplied in single-shade boxes of vials. The vial size and count are as printed on the box. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e on single boxes or mixed shade orders.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBB Glow #21, #23 or #25 — which shade do you need?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose the shade closest to the client's natural skin tone, or one step lighter for a brighter finish. The numbers follow the usual Korean base make-up scale.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/bb-glow-21\"\u003eBB Glow #21\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBB Glow #23\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/bb-glow-25\"\u003eBB Glow #25\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eShade\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDeeper \/ tan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGood fit for\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFair to light skin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLight-medium to medium skin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium to tan skin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMixing\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"3\"\u003eShades can be blended to match in-between tones\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e#23 is the shade most salons reach for first, because it can be lightened with #21 or deepened with #25. The \u003ca href=\"\/products\/bb-glow-starter-kit\"\u003eBB Glow Starter Kit\u003c\/a\u003e is another way to start with several shades in one box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is BB Glow #23 made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBB Glow #23 is a light, serum-textured base with cosmetic pigment. The formula lists niacinamide, peptides, hyaluronic acid and plant extracts. Niacinamide is a common brightening ingredient, and hyaluronic acid holds water in the skin. Check the full ingredient list on the box before use, especially for clients with known sensitivities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is BB Glow #23 used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBB Glow is a professional salon treatment, not a home-use make-up product. In a typical session the practitioner:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003col\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCleanses the skin and removes all make-up and oil.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eChooses or blends the shade and patch-tests if needed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApplies the serum in small sections and works it in with a microneedling pen or nano cartridge, following the manufacturer's instructions for depth and passes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLeaves the remaining serum on the skin and finishes with a calming product.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlways follow the instructions supplied with the product and the rules for microneedling in your country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow long does the BB Glow effect last?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe result is temporary and builds over a course. Salons commonly plan 3 to 5 sessions, spaced about one to two weeks apart, with top-ups as the tint fades. How long it holds depends on skin type, sun exposure and home care.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should BB Glow #23 be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore unopened vials in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight. Use an opened vial promptly and do not share one vial between clients. The expiry date is printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying BB Glow #23 from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to beauty professionals, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you place the order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e or browse more \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/peels-skincare\"\u003eprofessional peels and skin care\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use by trained practitioners only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBB Glow #23 FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat skin tone is BB Glow #23 for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLight-medium to medium skin tones. It is the middle shade of the three.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I mix #23 with other shades?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Blend it with #21 to lighten or with #25 to deepen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs BB Glow an injectable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a cosmetic serum applied to the skin surface during a professional treatment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many sessions are usual?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSalons commonly plan 3 to 5 sessions, about one to two weeks apart.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order mixed shades?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with the shades and quantities you need.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46868241645850,"sku":null,"price":110.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/BBGlow_23.jpg?v=1695951475"},{"product_id":"bb-glow-25","title":"BB Glow #25","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBB Glow #25\u003c\/strong\u003e is a tinted cosmetic serum in a deeper shade, made in South Korea under the DM.Cell brand. Beauticians and skin clinics use it for BB Glow treatments, where a pigmented serum is worked into the top layer of the skin to even out the look of the complexion. Shade #25 is the deepest of the three shades we stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is supplied in single-shade boxes of vials. The vial size and count are as printed on the box. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e on single boxes or mixed shade orders.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBB Glow #21, #23 or #25 — which shade do you need?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose the shade closest to the client's natural skin tone. A shade that is too light can look grey on deeper skin, so match carefully. The numbers follow the usual Korean base make-up scale.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/bb-glow-21\"\u003eBB Glow #21\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/bb-glow-23\"\u003eBB Glow #23\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBB Glow #25\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eShade\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDeeper \/ tan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGood fit for\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFair to light skin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLight-medium to medium skin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium to tan skin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMixing\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"3\"\u003eShades can be blended to match in-between tones\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e#25 is also useful as a mixing shade: a few drops deepen #23 for clients who sit between two tones. The \u003ca href=\"\/products\/bb-glow-starter-kit\"\u003eBB Glow Starter Kit\u003c\/a\u003e is another way to start with several shades in one box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is BB Glow #25 made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBB Glow #25 is a light, serum-textured base with cosmetic pigment. The formula lists niacinamide, peptides, hyaluronic acid and plant extracts. Niacinamide is a common brightening ingredient, and hyaluronic acid holds water in the skin. Check the full ingredient list on the box before use, especially for clients with known sensitivities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is BB Glow #25 used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBB Glow is a professional salon treatment, not a home-use make-up product. In a typical session the practitioner:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003col\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCleanses the skin and removes all make-up and oil.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eChooses or blends the shade and patch-tests if needed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApplies the serum in small sections and works it in with a microneedling pen or nano cartridge, following the manufacturer's instructions for depth and passes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLeaves the remaining serum on the skin and finishes with a calming product.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlways follow the instructions supplied with the product and the rules for microneedling in your country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow long does the BB Glow effect last?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe result is temporary and builds over a course. Salons commonly plan 3 to 5 sessions, spaced about one to two weeks apart, with top-ups as the tint fades. How long it holds depends on skin type, sun exposure and home care.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should BB Glow #25 be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore unopened vials in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight. Use an opened vial promptly and do not share one vial between clients. The expiry date is printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying BB Glow #25 from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to beauty professionals, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you place the order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e or browse more \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/peels-skincare\"\u003eprofessional peels and skin care\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use by trained practitioners only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBB Glow #25 FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat skin tone is BB Glow #25 for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMedium to tan skin tones. It is the deepest of the three shades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I mix #25 with #23?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Practitioners often blend two shades to match a client's tone.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs BB Glow an injectable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a cosmetic serum applied to the skin surface during a professional treatment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many sessions are usual?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSalons commonly plan 3 to 5 sessions, about one to two weeks apart.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order mixed shades?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with the shades and quantities you need.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46868241776922,"sku":null,"price":110.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/BBGlow_25.jpg?v=1695951700"},{"product_id":"bb-glow-starter-kit","title":"BB Glow Starter Kit","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBB Glow Starter Kit\u003c\/strong\u003e is a Korean-made set of 12 ampoules for professional BB Glow skin treatments. The box holds five tinted ampoules in different shades and seven clear serum ampoules, 8 mL each, plus two droppers. It lets a salon or clinic try the treatment on a range of skin tones before buying full boxes of one shade.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBB Glow is a cosmetic treatment in which a tinted serum is worked into the top layer of the skin to even out the look of the complexion. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is in the BB Glow Starter Kit?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe kit contains 12 ampoules of 8 mL and two droppers for measuring and blending.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eQuantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat it is for\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTinted ampoules\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 (one per shade)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLight, Light Rose, Medium, Deep and Deep Plus tones for the BB Glow step\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSerum ampoules\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUntinted care serums used to prepare and nourish the skin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDroppers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClean dosing and shade blending\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact ampoule names are printed on the box. Check them on arrival, as the maker may update the set.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is the kit made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe tinted ampoules are serum-textured bases with cosmetic pigment. The formulas list niacinamide, peptides, hyaluronic acid and plant extracts. The serum ampoules add vitamins and antioxidants without tint. Read the ingredient list for each ampoule before use, especially for clients with known sensitivities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStarter Kit or single-shade boxes — which should you order?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrder the Starter Kit when you are setting up the treatment or training staff. You get every tone in one box, so you can learn which shades your clients need. Move to single-shade boxes once you know your regular shades. We stock \u003ca href=\"\/products\/bb-glow-21\"\u003eBB Glow #21\u003c\/a\u003e (light), \u003ca href=\"\/products\/bb-glow-23\"\u003eBB Glow #23\u003c\/a\u003e (medium) and \u003ca href=\"\/products\/bb-glow-25\"\u003eBB Glow #25\u003c\/a\u003e (deeper).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is the BB Glow Starter Kit used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBB Glow is a professional salon treatment. In a typical session the practitioner:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003col\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCleanses the skin and removes all make-up and oil.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApplies a clear serum ampoule to prepare the skin, if the protocol calls for it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePicks or blends a tinted shade with the dropper and patch-tests if needed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorks the tinted serum in with a microneedling pen or nano cartridge, following the manufacturer's instructions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinishes with a calming product and sun protection advice.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSalons commonly plan 3 to 5 sessions, about one to two weeks apart. The result is temporary and depends on skin type and home care.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should the kit be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore unopened ampoules in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight. Use an opened ampoule promptly and never share one between clients. The expiry date is printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying the BB Glow Starter Kit from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to beauty professionals, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you place the order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e or browse more \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/peels-skincare\"\u003eprofessional peels and skin care\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use by trained practitioners only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBB Glow Starter Kit FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many ampoules are in the kit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTwelve ampoules of 8 mL: five tinted shades and seven serum ampoules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich shades are included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLight, Light Rose, Medium, Deep and Deep Plus.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the shades be mixed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Use the droppers to blend two shades to match a client's tone.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs BB Glow an injectable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a cosmetic serum applied to the skin surface during a professional treatment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDo you sell refills of one shade?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. See BB Glow #21, #23 and #25, or \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eask our team\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46868241875226,"sku":null,"price":110.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/BBGlowStarterKit.jpg?v=1695951896"},{"product_id":"bienpeel","title":"Bienpeel","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBienpeel\u003c\/strong\u003e is a two-phase (biphasic) professional chemical peel from South Korea with 35% trichloroacetic acid (TCA). Each box holds 5 vials of 6 mL. One phase carries the acids, vitamins and amino acids; the other is an oil phase of squalane and isopropyl myristate that cushions the skin while the acids work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClinics and trained skin therapists use it for dull tone, uneven texture, enlarged pores and post-acne marks. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Bienpeel made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBienpeel combines TCA 35% with milder acids and skin-conditioning ingredients in two layers that you shake together before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAcid phase:\u003c\/strong\u003e trichloroacetic acid 35%, lactobionic acid, salicylic acid, tartaric acid and citric acid.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSupport ingredients:\u003c\/strong\u003e vitamin C, vitamin B2, amino acids such as glycine, and gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA).\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOil phase:\u003c\/strong\u003e squalane and isopropyl myristate.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Bienpeel used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBienpeel is applied to the skin surface and massaged in, then rinsed off. A usual session runs like this:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003col\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCleanse and degrease the skin.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShake the vial until the two layers blend into one even colour.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWearing gloves, apply about 1.5–2 mL to the face with a brush or needle-free syringe.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMassage until absorbed and leave for about 5 minutes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRinse with lukewarm water and apply a finishing cream and sun protection.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese steps are a general guide. Follow the instructions in the box and adjust contact time to the client's skin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow many Bienpeel sessions are needed?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA course is usually 4 to 7 sessions, 7 to 10 days apart, depending on skin condition. One 6 mL vial covers roughly three face treatments at 1.5–2 mL each, so one box supports about one full course.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBienpeel vs Soonsu Shining Peel — what is the difference?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth are Korean two-phase TCA 35% peels in 5 × 6 mL boxes. The main difference is the supporting formula.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBienpeel\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/soonsu-shining-peel\"\u003eSoonsu Shining Peel\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTCA\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOther acids\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLactobionic, salicylic, tartaric, citric\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAHA, BHA and PHA blend\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eExtras\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVitamins C and B2, GABA, amino acids\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVitamins C and B12, retinol, amino acids, peptides\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUsual course\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4–7 sessions, 7–10 days apart\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4–6 sessions, 7–12 days apart\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Bienpeel be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore vials upright in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight, with the cap closed. The expiry date is printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Bienpeel from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship original boxes worldwide from Seoul to clinics, skin professionals and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e or browse more \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/peels-skincare\"\u003eprofessional peels and skin care\u003c\/a\u003e. Many clinics finish a peel with a simple moisturiser such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/soonsu-aqua-cream\"\u003eSoonsu Aqua Cream\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use by trained practitioners only. Not for home use.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBienpeel FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat strength is Bienpeel?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt contains 35% trichloroacetic acid in a two-phase formula.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many vials are in a box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFive vials of 6 mL each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I need to neutralise it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe usual protocol is to rinse with lukewarm water after about 5 minutes. Follow the instructions in the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow often can it be repeated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery 7 to 10 days, for 4 to 7 sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat should clients avoid after a session?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSun exposure, scrubs and other acid or retinoid products for several days. Daily sunscreen is essential.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46868243251482,"sku":null,"price":195.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/Bienpeel.webp?v=1696049734"},{"product_id":"celosome-aqua-1","title":"Celosome Aqua","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCelosome Aqua\u003c\/strong\u003e is a hyaluronic acid (HA) skin booster from the Celosome range by ExoCoBio, South Korea. Each box holds five 2.5 mL pre-filled syringes of clear gel with 24 mg\/mL HA and 0.9% mannitol. It is used for skin hydration and biorevitalisation rather than for adding volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne box gives 12.5 mL in total, enough for several sessions. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e on volume orders.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Celosome Aqua made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCelosome Aqua contains two listed ingredients: non-animal hyaluronic acid at 24 mg\/mL and mannitol at 0.9% (9 mg\/mL).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHyaluronic acid\u003c\/strong\u003e binds water in the skin. It is the hydrating part of the formula.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMannitol\u003c\/strong\u003e is an antioxidant sugar alcohol. In HA products it is added to help protect the HA from breaking down too quickly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe gel is transparent, colourless and sterile. Aqua does not contain lidocaine, so many clinics apply a \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/anesthetics-ointments\"\u003enumbing cream\u003c\/a\u003e before treatment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCelosome Aqua vs Celosome fillers — what is the difference?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAqua treats skin quality; the four Celosome fillers treat lines and volume. They are not interchangeable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCelosome Aqua\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/celosome-soft-1\"\u003eSoft\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/celosome-mid-1\"\u003eMid\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/celosome-strong-1\"\u003eStrong\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/celosome-implant-1\"\u003eImplant\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSkin booster\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"4\"\u003eDermal filler\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePurpose\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydration, skin texture, fine lines\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFine lines, lips\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModerate folds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDeep folds, contouring\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChin, cheeks, jawline\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAdded ingredient\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.9% mannitol\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"4\"\u003e0.3% lidocaine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBox\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 × 2.5 mL syringes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"4\"\u003e1 × 1.1 mL syringe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Celosome Aqua used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCelosome Aqua is used to hydrate and refresh skin that looks dry, dull or tired. Typical concerns are:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDry or dehydrated skin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoss of elasticity and early fine lines\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDull or uneven-looking skin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFace, neck and other areas where skin quality has dropped\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is designed for superficial placement in the skin by a trained professional. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use for technique, depth and volume per session.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow many sessions are needed?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSkin boosters are normally given as a short course rather than a single treatment. Clinics commonly plan a few sessions several weeks apart, then maintenance. The exact plan should follow the manufacturer's leaflet and the clinician's assessment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Celosome Aqua be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore Celosome Aqua at room temperature, away from direct sunlight, and do not freeze it. Follow the temperature range and expiry date printed on the box. Each syringe is single use — do not keep an opened syringe for another patient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Celosome Aqua from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you place the order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e, or compare other \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eKorean skin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran\"\u003eRejuran\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCelosome Aqua FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in a box of Celosome Aqua?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFive pre-filled syringes of 2.5 mL each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Celosome Aqua a filler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a skin booster for hydration and skin quality. It does not add structural volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Celosome Aqua contain lidocaine?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The listed ingredients are hyaluronic acid and mannitol.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy is mannitol added?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMannitol is an antioxidant that helps protect hyaluronic acid from early breakdown.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order Celosome Aqua wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eSend us\u003c\/a\u003e your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46868461060378,"sku":null,"price":76.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/CelosomeAqua.jpg?v=1696058850"},{"product_id":"metoo-healer","title":"Metoo Healer","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMetoo Healer\u003c\/strong\u003e is a skin booster made by Maypharm in South Korea. It combines PDRN and hyaluronic acid with 53 supporting actives — vitamins, amino acids, coenzymes, nucleic acids, minerals and an antioxidant. This listing is for a box of ten 3 mL vials. Clinics use it to nourish and hydrate tired skin and to improve tone and texture.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for trade pricing and current stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Metoo Healer made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMetoo Healer is built on PDRN and hyaluronic acid, plus a 53-part nutrient mix. The manufacturer calls the formula \"PDRN Boost CH\".\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGroup\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNumber\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNotes\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAmino acids\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e23\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInclude arginine, lysine and histidine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVitamins\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInclude a B complex with niacinamide and biotin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCoenzymes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupport cell metabolism\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinerals\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTrace elements\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNucleic acids\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBuilding blocks of DNA and RNA\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAntioxidant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProtects against oxidative stress\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manufacturer does not publish the concentration of each ingredient. Some suppliers quote 0.5% PDRN; check the box for the figures that apply to your batch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Metoo Healer used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manufacturer says the formula is aimed at fibroblast function. It lists nutrient-rich hydration, a stronger skin barrier, support for skin regeneration, and better tone and texture. Clinics use it for dry, dull or tired skin, fine lines and enlarged pores.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Metoo Healer different from a plain PDRN booster?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA plain PDRN or PN booster such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran\"\u003eRejuran\u003c\/a\u003e relies on DNA fragments alone. Metoo Healer adds hyaluronic acid and a broad vitamin and amino acid mix, closer to a mesotherapy cocktail. \u003ca href=\"\/products\/kiara-reju\"\u003eKiara Reju\u003c\/a\u003e sits in between, with PDRN, hyaluronic acid and niacinamide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Metoo Healer used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMetoo Healer is supplied in vials for use by a trained professional. The manufacturer lists it as an injectable skin booster. Many clinics apply a \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/anesthetics-ointments\"\u003enumbing cream\u003c\/a\u003e first, because the product is placed with many small injections. We do not publish depths, volumes or session plans for this product. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Metoo Healer be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore Metoo Healer as directed on the box, in its original packaging and away from direct sunlight. Do not freeze. The shelf life is printed on the box. Check the seal and the expiry date before use. Each syringe or vial is for one patient and one session only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Metoo Healer from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eKorean skin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e. The Maypharm range also includes \u003ca href=\"\/products\/metox-100u\"\u003eMetox\u003c\/a\u003e. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMetoo Healer FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Metoo Healer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMaypharm, South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in the box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTen 3 mL vials, as listed for this product. Check the pack details on the box you receive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many ingredients does Metoo Healer have?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePDRN and hyaluronic acid plus 53 supporting actives: 23 amino acids, 12 vitamins, 6 coenzymes, 6 minerals, 5 nucleic acids and 1 antioxidant.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Metoo Healer a filler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a skin booster. It improves skin quality and does not add volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan people with a fish allergy have it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePDRN is usually taken from salmon, so a known fish allergy is a reason not to treat. The treating doctor decides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order Metoo Healer wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883032629530,"sku":null,"price":251.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/MetooHealer.webp?v=1695969620"},{"product_id":"p-cell","title":"P-Cell","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eP-Cell\u003c\/strong\u003e is a skin booster made by Mediable Co., Ltd. in South Korea. Each box holds five 3 mL vials of a concentrated PDRN-based solution. Clinics use it to calm and hydrate stressed skin and to support recovery after procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for trade pricing and current stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is P-Cell made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eP-Cell is listed as a PDRN (polydeoxyribonucleotide) solution with hyaluronic acid. PDRN is a purified DNA fragment, usually taken from salmon. Hyaluronic acid holds water in the skin. The manufacturer does not publish concentrations in the trade information we could verify, so check the ingredient list printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is P-Cell used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manufacturer lists these skin concerns:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003every dry skin that needs hydration\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ewrinkles and fine lines\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eredness left by acne\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003escars and skin that heals slowly\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eirritated or stressed skin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is a soothing, skin-quality product. It does not add volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is P-Cell used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eP-Cell must be used the way the manufacturer's instructions describe. The manufacturer's trade listing presents it as a soothing care essence, while some suppliers describe it as an injectable booster. Because the route is not confirmed, we do not publish an injection protocol. Read the leaflet in the box before use and follow it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow does P-Cell compare with other PDRN boosters?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe table shows where P-Cell sits next to PDRN products with a published composition.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eP-Cell\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/kiara-reju\"\u003eKiara Reju\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/syniro-pdrn\"\u003eSyniro PDRN\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mL vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.2 mL syringes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.2 mL syringes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eListed actives\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePDRN, hyaluronic acid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePDRN 5 mg\/mL, HA 20 mg\/mL, niacinamide 1 mg\/mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePDRN 2%, HA 2%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaker\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMediable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBioPlus\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBNC Global\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow many sessions does P-Cell need?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manufacturer does not publish a fixed plan in the information we could verify. Soothing and repair products are normally used as a short course. The professional in charge sets the number of sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should P-Cell be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore P-Cell as directed on the box, in its original packaging and away from direct sunlight. Do not freeze. The shelf life is printed on the box. Use each vial for one person and one session, and discard what is left.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying P-Cell from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eKorean skin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e, or see \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran\"\u003eRejuran\u003c\/a\u003e for a polynucleotide option. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use only. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eP-Cell FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes P-Cell?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMediable Co., Ltd., South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in the box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFive 3 mL vials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does PDRN stand for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePolydeoxyribonucleotide — purified DNA fragments used in skin-repair products.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs P-Cell injected?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFollow the instructions in the box. The route of use is not confirmed in the manufacturer information we could verify, so we do not publish an injection protocol.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs P-Cell a filler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a skin-quality product and does not add volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order P-Cell wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883033186586,"sku":null,"price":100.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/P-Cell.webp?v=1695969938"},{"product_id":"regenovue-aqua-shine","title":"Regenovue Aqua Shine","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRegenovue Aqua Shine\u003c\/strong\u003e is a hyaluronic acid (HA) skin booster made by NeoGenesis Co., Ltd. in South Korea. Each box holds three 3 mL pre-filled syringes of non-cross-linked HA at 15 mg\/mL. Clinics use it to hydrate dry, dull skin and give a fresh, even glow.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is a skin-quality treatment, not a volume filler. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for trade pricing and current stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAqua Shine, Aqua Shine Plus or Regenovue PN — which one?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose by how long you want the hydration to last and whether you also want a repair ingredient. All three come from the same maker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAqua Shine\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/regenovue-aqua-shine-plus\"\u003eAqua Shine Plus\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/regenovue-pn\"\u003eRegenovue PN\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMain ingredient\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNon-cross-linked HA, 15 mg\/mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimally cross-linked HA, 15 mg\/mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHA plus salmon polynucleotide (PN)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMain aim\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFast hydration and glow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLonger-lasting hydration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydration plus skin repair\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaker's session plan\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAt least 3 sessions, monthly\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAt least 3 sessions, every 2 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4–5 weekly sessions, then every 2–3 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStated duration\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOver 3 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOver 6 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 6 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSyringe\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAqua Shine is the lightest of the three. It suits first-time patients and regular \"glow\" sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Regenovue Aqua Shine made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRegenovue Aqua Shine is purified, non-cross-linked hyaluronic acid at 15 mg\/mL. The maker lists no other active ingredient. Because the HA is not cross-linked, the gel is fluid and spreads evenly in the skin instead of forming volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Regenovue Aqua Shine used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is used to improve skin hydration, texture and radiance. Typical patients have dry or tired-looking skin, fine dryness lines or a rough surface. It is used on the face and can also be used on the neck, décolleté and backs of the hands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Regenovue Aqua Shine used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRegenovue Aqua Shine is injected into the skin in many small deposits by a trained professional, by hand or with a multi-needle injector. Many clinics apply a \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/anesthetics-ointments\"\u003enumbing cream\u003c\/a\u003e first, because the product is placed with many small injections. Depth and volume per point should follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow many sessions does Regenovue Aqua Shine need?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manufacturer suggests at least three sessions, one month apart. It states that the effect lasts more than three months. The plan can be changed to suit the patient's skin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Regenovue Aqua Shine be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore Regenovue Aqua Shine as directed on the box, in its original packaging and away from direct sunlight. Do not freeze. The shelf life is printed on the box. Check the seal and the expiry date before use. Each syringe or vial is for one patient and one session only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Regenovue Aqua Shine from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eKorean skin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e, or compare with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/hyaron-1\"\u003eHyaron\u003c\/a\u003e, another non-cross-linked HA booster. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRegenovue Aqua Shine FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Regenovue Aqua Shine?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNeoGenesis Co., Ltd., South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in the box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThree 3 mL pre-filled syringes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Aqua Shine a filler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a fluid, non-cross-linked HA skin booster. It hydrates the skin and does not add volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between Aqua Shine and Aqua Shine Plus?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAqua Shine uses non-cross-linked HA. \u003ca href=\"\/products\/regenovue-aqua-shine-plus\"\u003eAqua Shine Plus\u003c\/a\u003e uses minimally cross-linked HA, which the maker says lasts longer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow long does Aqua Shine last?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manufacturer states more than three months after a course of at least three sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order Aqua Shine wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883033612570,"sku":null,"price":55.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/RegenovueAquaShine.webp?v=1695970235"},{"product_id":"regenovue-pn","title":"Regenovue PN","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRegenovue PN\u003c\/strong\u003e is a skin booster from the Regenovue range by NeoGenesis Co., Ltd., South Korea. It combines hyaluronic acid (HA) with polynucleotide (PN) taken from salmon DNA, in one 3 mL pre-filled syringe. Clinics use it to hydrate the skin and support its repair at the same time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is a skin-quality treatment, not a volume filler. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for trade pricing and current stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRegenovue PN, Aqua Shine or Aqua Shine Plus — which one?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose Regenovue PN when the skin needs repair as well as water — for example thin, tired or sun-damaged skin. The Aqua Shine products contain HA only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/regenovue-aqua-shine\"\u003eAqua Shine\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/regenovue-aqua-shine-plus\"\u003eAqua Shine Plus\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRegenovue PN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMain ingredient\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNon-cross-linked HA, 15 mg\/mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimally cross-linked HA, 15 mg\/mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHA plus salmon polynucleotide (PN)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMain aim\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFast hydration and glow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLonger-lasting hydration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydration plus skin repair\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaker's session plan\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAt least 3 sessions, monthly\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAt least 3 sessions, every 2 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4–5 weekly sessions, then every 2–3 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStated duration\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOver 3 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOver 6 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 6 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSyringe\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Regenovue PN made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRegenovue PN has two active ingredients: hyaluronic acid and salmon-derived polynucleotide. Trade information lists 15 mg of HA and 5 mg of PN for the 3 mL syringe. Suppliers give slightly different figures, so check the composition printed on the box of the batch you receive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHyaluronic acid\u003c\/strong\u003e holds water in the skin.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePolynucleotide (PN)\u003c\/strong\u003e is a chain of DNA fragments. It is used to support fibroblasts, the cells that make collagen and elastin.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Regenovue PN used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is used to improve moisture, elasticity and the skin barrier, and to soften fine lines. It is used on the face, neck, décolleté and hands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Regenovue PN used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA trained professional injects small deposits into the upper layers of the skin. Many clinics apply a \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/anesthetics-ointments\"\u003enumbing cream\u003c\/a\u003e first, because the product is placed with many small injections. Depth and volume per point should follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow many sessions does Regenovue PN need?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTrade information for the product suggests four to five sessions, one week apart, then a maintenance session every two to three months. The effect is described as lasting about six months. The treating clinician sets the final plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Regenovue PN be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore Regenovue PN as directed on the box, in its original packaging and away from direct sunlight. Do not freeze. The shelf life is printed on the box. Check the seal and the expiry date before use. Each syringe or vial is for one patient and one session only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Regenovue PN from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Compare other salmon-DNA boosters such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran\"\u003eRejuran\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/products\/kiara-reju\"\u003eKiara Reju\u003c\/a\u003e, or browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eskin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRegenovue PN FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Regenovue PN?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt belongs to the Regenovue range by NeoGenesis Co., Ltd., South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in the box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne 3 mL pre-filled syringe.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does PN mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePolynucleotide — purified DNA fragments, here taken from salmon.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Regenovue PN a filler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a skin booster. It improves skin quality and does not add volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan people with a fish allergy have it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePN comes from salmon, so a known fish allergy is a reason not to treat. The treating doctor decides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order Regenovue PN wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883034169626,"sku":null,"price":55.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/RegenovuePN.jpg?v=1695971453"},{"product_id":"rejuran","title":"Rejuran Healer","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRejuran Healer\u003c\/strong\u003e is a polynucleotide (PN) skin booster made by PharmaResearch in South Korea. Each box holds two 2 mL pre-filled syringes of 2% PN, purified from salmon DNA. Clinics use it across the whole face and neck to improve skin texture, fine lines, pore size and elasticity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is the original product in the Rejuran range. We ship it from Seoul in original packaging. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eAsk us about trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e if you order in volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Rejuran Healer made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe only active ingredient is polynucleotide at 2% (20 mg per mL). PN is a long chain of purified DNA fragments taken from salmon. There is no hyaluronic acid and no lidocaine in the syringe.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRejuran Healer is a skin booster, not a filler. PN binds water in the dermis and is reported to support fibroblasts, the cells that make collagen. The skin is not filled; it slowly becomes denser and smoother.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRejuran Healer vs HB vs I vs S — which one do you need?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose Healer for overall skin quality on the full face. The other three are the same PN idea adjusted for one job: comfort and hydration (HB), the eye area (I) or scars (S).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRejuran Healer\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran-hb\"\u003eRejuran HB\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran-i\"\u003eRejuran I\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran-s\"\u003eRejuran S\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFormula\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePN 2%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePN + hyaluronic acid + lidocaine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePN 1%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePN 2%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBox\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mL × 2 syringes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 mL × 1 syringe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 mL × 1 syringe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 mL × 1 syringe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGel feel\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoft, more hydrating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThin and fluid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThick and dense\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMain use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFull face and neck: texture, fine lines, pores, elasticity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDry or dull skin; patients who want less injection pain\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnder-eye skin and crow's feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAcne scars and depressed scars, spot by spot\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLidocaine\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMany clinics pair two products in one visit: Healer for the face and \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran-i\"\u003eRejuran I\u003c\/a\u003e for the thin skin under the eyes. For a patient with old acne marks, \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran-s\"\u003eRejuran S\u003c\/a\u003e is placed under each scar and Healer is used on the skin around it. If a patient finds PN injections too sore, \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran-hb\"\u003eRejuran HB\u003c\/a\u003e is the gentler option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow many sessions of Rejuran Healer are needed?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMost published clinic plans use three to four sessions, three to four weeks apart, then one maintenance session every 6 to 12 months. The table below is a typical reference plan, not a rule.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTiming\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUsual amount\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSession 1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeek 0\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 2 mL syringe for a full face\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSession 2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeek 3–4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 2 mL syringe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSession 3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeek 6–8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 2 mL syringe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSession 4 (optional)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeek 9–12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 2 mL syringe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaintenance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEvery 6–12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 2 mL syringe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne box covers two full-face sessions, so two boxes cover a four-session course for one patient. The treating clinician sets the final plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Rejuran Healer injected?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is injected into the dermis with a fine needle, in a grid of small droplets about 1 cm apart. Each point takes a very small amount, often around 0.05 mL. Small raised bumps are normal and usually flatten within one to three days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe syringe has no anaesthetic, so most clinics apply a \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/anesthetics-ointments\"\u003enumbing cream\u003c\/a\u003e for 20 to 30 minutes first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen do results show and how long do they last?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eResults are gradual. Skin often looks more even and hydrated two to four weeks after a session, and improves further with each visit. After a full course, clinics commonly report results lasting around 6 to 12 months. This varies with age, skin condition and lifestyle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Rejuran Healer be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore the box at room temperature as printed on the packaging, away from direct sunlight. Do not freeze. Check the expiry date and the seal before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Rejuran Healer from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eKorean skin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e, or compare with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/kiara-reju\"\u003eKiara Reju\u003c\/a\u003e, another PN booster we stock. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRejuran Healer FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Rejuran Healer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePharmaResearch Co., Ltd., South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Rejuran Healer a filler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a polynucleotide skin booster. It improves skin quality and does not add volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much is in one box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTwo pre-filled syringes of 2 mL each, 4 mL in total.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Rejuran Healer contain lidocaine?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. If you want PN with built-in lidocaine, see \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran-hb\"\u003eRejuran HB\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRejuran Healer or Rejuran I for under the eyes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRejuran I. It is a thinner 1% PN gel made for the fine skin around the eyes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order Rejuran Healer wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and country for trade pricing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883035119898,"sku":null,"price":229.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/Rejuran.jpg?v=1695972099"},{"product_id":"rejuran-hb","title":"Rejuran HB","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRejuran HB\u003c\/strong\u003e is a skin booster from PharmaResearch in South Korea that combines salmon-derived polynucleotide (PN) with hyaluronic acid (HA) and lidocaine. Each box holds one 1 mL pre-filled syringe. Clinics choose it for dry, dull skin and for patients who find standard PN injections too sore.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCurrent stock is sold under the name Rejuran HB Plus, the version with lidocaine in the syringe. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for trade pricing and current stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Rejuran HB made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRejuran HB has three ingredients: sodium polynucleotide, sodium hyaluronate and lidocaine hydrochloride. PN supports skin repair, HA holds water in the skin, and lidocaine numbs the area as you inject.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact strength of each ingredient is printed on the box. The HA is there for hydration, not volume, so Rejuran HB is a skin booster and not a filler.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRejuran HB vs Healer, I and S — which one?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePick Rejuran HB when hydration and comfort matter most. Pick \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran\"\u003eRejuran Healer\u003c\/a\u003e when you want PN alone at 2% for the full face.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran\"\u003eRejuran Healer\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRejuran HB\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran-i\"\u003eRejuran I\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran-s\"\u003eRejuran S\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFormula\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePN 2%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePN + hyaluronic acid + lidocaine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePN 1%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePN 2%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBox\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mL × 2 syringes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 mL × 1 syringe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 mL × 1 syringe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 mL × 1 syringe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGel feel\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoft, more hydrating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThin and fluid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThick and dense\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMain use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFull face and neck: texture, fine lines, pores, elasticity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDry or dull skin; patients who want less injection pain\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnder-eye skin and crow's feet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAcne scars and depressed scars, spot by spot\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLidocaine\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause HA and lidocaine share the syringe, HB carries less PN per mL than Healer. In return, the injection is much more comfortable and the skin gets an early \"water glow\" from the HA.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Rejuran HB used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRejuran HB is injected into the dermis in small droplets across the treatment area. Clinics commonly plan three sessions, two to four weeks apart, with maintenance every 6 to 12 months. Small bumps at the injection points usually settle in one to two days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSupplier listings give the face, neck, décolleté and backs of the hands as treatment areas. The treating clinician decides the amount and the plan for each patient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat results can patients expect?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePatients usually notice fresher, better-hydrated skin first, because HA works quickly. The PN effect on texture, fine lines and elasticity builds over the course. Clinics commonly report results lasting 6 to 12 months after a full course.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Rejuran HB be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore the box as printed on the packaging, away from direct sunlight. Do not freeze. Check the seal and expiry date before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Rejuran HB from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eKorean skin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRejuran HB FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Rejuran HB?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePharmaResearch Co., Ltd., South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Rejuran HB contain lidocaine?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Rejuran HB Plus has lidocaine in the syringe to reduce injection pain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much is in one box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne 1 mL pre-filled syringe.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Rejuran HB a filler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a PN and HA skin booster. It hydrates and supports skin repair but does not add volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRejuran HB or Rejuran Healer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHB for dry skin and low pain tolerance. Healer for a stronger PN-only treatment of the full face.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883035644186,"sku":null,"price":98.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/RejuranHB.jpg?v=1695972539"},{"product_id":"regenovue-aqua-shine-plus","title":"Regenovue Aqua Shine Plus","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRegenovue Aqua Shine Plus\u003c\/strong\u003e is a hyaluronic acid (HA) skin booster made by NeoGenesis Co., Ltd. in South Korea. Each box holds three 3 mL pre-filled syringes of minimally cross-linked HA at 15 mg\/mL. It is the longer-lasting version of Aqua Shine, used to hydrate the skin and improve its texture.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is a skin-quality treatment, not a volume filler. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for trade pricing and current stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAqua Shine Plus, Aqua Shine or Regenovue PN — which one?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose Aqua Shine Plus when you want hydration that lasts longer between sessions. Light cross-linking slows the breakdown of the HA.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/regenovue-aqua-shine\"\u003eAqua Shine\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAqua Shine Plus\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/regenovue-pn\"\u003eRegenovue PN\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMain ingredient\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNon-cross-linked HA, 15 mg\/mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimally cross-linked HA, 15 mg\/mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHA plus salmon polynucleotide (PN)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMain aim\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFast hydration and glow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLonger-lasting hydration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydration plus skin repair\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaker's session plan\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAt least 3 sessions, monthly\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAt least 3 sessions, every 2 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4–5 weekly sessions, then every 2–3 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStated duration\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOver 3 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOver 6 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 6 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSyringe\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMany clinics start a patient on Aqua Shine and move to Aqua Shine Plus for maintenance with fewer visits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Regenovue Aqua Shine Plus made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRegenovue Aqua Shine Plus is hyaluronic acid at 15 mg\/mL that has been lightly (\"minimally\") cross-linked. This keeps the gel soft enough to spread in the skin while helping it stay longer than free HA. The manufacturer's brochure lists no other active ingredient. Some suppliers mention lidocaine; check the box of the batch you receive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Regenovue Aqua Shine Plus used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is used to improve hydration, elasticity and surface texture, and to soften fine lines caused by dryness. It is used on the face, including the forehead, around the eyes and mouth, and on the neck.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Regenovue Aqua Shine Plus used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA trained professional injects small deposits into the skin, by hand or with a multi-needle injector. Many clinics apply a \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/anesthetics-ointments\"\u003enumbing cream\u003c\/a\u003e first, because the product is placed with many small injections. Depth and volume per point should follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow many sessions does Regenovue Aqua Shine Plus need?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manufacturer suggests at least three sessions, two months apart. It states that the effect lasts more than six months. The plan can be changed to suit the patient's skin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Regenovue Aqua Shine Plus be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore Regenovue Aqua Shine Plus as directed on the box, in its original packaging and away from direct sunlight. Do not freeze. The shelf life is printed on the box. Check the seal and the expiry date before use. Each syringe or vial is for one patient and one session only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Regenovue Aqua Shine Plus from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eKorean skin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e. For lines that need real volume, see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/dermal-fillers\"\u003edermal fillers\u003c\/a\u003e. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRegenovue Aqua Shine Plus FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Regenovue Aqua Shine Plus?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNeoGenesis Co., Ltd., South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in the box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThree 3 mL pre-filled syringes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the HA cross-linked?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, but only lightly. The maker calls it minimally cross-linked HA.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow is it different from Aqua Shine?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/regenovue-aqua-shine\"\u003eAqua Shine\u003c\/a\u003e uses non-cross-linked HA and is repeated monthly. Aqua Shine Plus is lightly cross-linked and is repeated every two months.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow long does Aqua Shine Plus last?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manufacturer states more than six months after a course of at least three sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order Aqua Shine Plus wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883046949146,"sku":null,"price":55.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/RegenovueAquaShinePlus.jpg?v=1696141403"},{"product_id":"melsmon","title":"Melsmon","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMelsmon\u003c\/strong\u003e is a human placenta extract injection made by Melsmon Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. in Japan. Each 2 mL ampoule holds 100 mg of water-soluble substance from broken-down human placental villi. This listing is a box of 50 ampoules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMelsmon is a prescription-type injectable. This page sets out what is in the ampoule, how it is packed and how to store it. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eAsk us about trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e if you order in volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Melsmon made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMelsmon contains one active substance and one excipient. The figures below are from the manufacturer's package insert.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eItem\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePer 2 mL ampoule\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eActive\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mg water-soluble substance of hydrolysed human placental villi\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExcipient\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBenzyl alcohol 0.03 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAppearance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClear, slightly yellow liquid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003epH\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6.8–7.0\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMelsmon vs Laennec and other placenta injections — what is the difference?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThey share a source but they are not the same medicine. Each maker uses its own process, so the amount and type of active differ. Do not swap one for another without checking the insert.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eActive as listed\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmount per 2 mL\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack on this site\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMelsmon\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHuman placenta extract\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 ampoules\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/laennec-inj\"\u003eLaennec\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHuman placenta hydrolysate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e112 mg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mL ampoules, count as printed on the box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/jbp-plamon-human-placenta-extract-inj\"\u003eJBP Plamon\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHuman placenta extract\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAs printed on the box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 ampoules\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/plagensia-10a\"\u003ePlagensia 10A\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHuman placenta preparation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAs printed on the ampoule\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 ampoules, no outer box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/placein-m\"\u003ePlacein M\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHuman placenta extract\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAs printed on the box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Melsmon used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manufacturer's insert lists Melsmon for menopausal symptoms and for insufficient lactation, given by subcutaneous injection. We do not make skin or anti-ageing claims for it. Whether it suits a patient is a decision for the prescribing clinician.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Melsmon dosed?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDosing follows the product insert and the prescribing clinician. We do not publish dose, frequency or course length for prescription-type injectables, and nothing on this page replaces the insert in the box. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Melsmon be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore Melsmon at room temperature, away from light. The insert gives a shelf life of 3 years from manufacture — check the date printed on the box. Keep ampoules sealed in the carton until use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat should clinics know before using Melsmon?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis is a medicine made from human placenta. Donor screening and heat treatment lower the risk of passing on infection, but they cannot remove it completely. Explain this to the patient and obtain consent before treatment. Record the batch number in the patient file. In some countries people who have received a human placenta injection may no longer donate blood, so raise this at the consultation. Do not use it in patients who have reacted to it before.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Melsmon from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship Melsmon worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you place the order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e, browse our other \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/vitamins-injectables\"\u003evitamin and nutrient injectables\u003c\/a\u003e, or \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMelsmon FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Melsmon?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMelsmon Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd., Japan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many ampoules are in a box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis listing is a box of 50 ampoules of 2 mL each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Melsmon contain a preservative?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Each ampoule contains 0.03 mL of benzyl alcohol.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Melsmon need to be kept in the fridge?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The insert states room temperature storage, away from light.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Melsmon the same as Laennec?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Melsmon lists 100 mg of placenta extract per ampoule and \u003ca href=\"\/products\/laennec-inj\"\u003eLaennec\u003c\/a\u003e lists 112 mg of placenta hydrolysate. They are made by different companies with different processes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883051864346,"sku":null,"price":352.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/Melsmon.png?v=1696057557"},{"product_id":"miracle-touch-br","title":"Miracle Touch BR","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMiracle Touch BR\u003c\/strong\u003e is a brightening skin booster from the Korean Miracle range. Each box holds 5 vials of 2 mL. The formula combines three oligopeptides, vitamin C, niacinamide, hyaluronic acid and the Brightening Complex XT80. It is made for skin with dark spots, uneven tone and dullness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBR is the tone-focused product in the range. For firmness, see \u003ca href=\"\/products\/miracle-touch-up\"\u003eMiracle Touch Up\u003c\/a\u003e. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Miracle Touch BR made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMiracle Touch BR is built on peptides and vitamins rather than a filler gel. The main ingredients are:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOligopeptide-34, -50 and -51\u003c\/strong\u003e — biomimetic peptides used in brightening care to act on the melanin pathway.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrightening Complex XT80\u003c\/strong\u003e — a blend of amino acids and vitamins.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVitamin C\u003c\/strong\u003e — an antioxidant.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNiacinamide\u003c\/strong\u003e — supports an even tone and the skin barrier.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHyaluronic acid\u003c\/strong\u003e — holds water in the skin.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndividual concentrations are not published, so we do not quote them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Miracle Touch BR used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is used to even out skin tone. Clinics choose it for sun spots, age spots, freckles, hormone-related discolouration and dull, dehydrated skin. It does not add volume and is not a filler.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMiracle Touch BR vs the rest of the Miracle range\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePick by the main concern: tone, firmness or hydration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMiracle Touch BR\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/miracle-touch-up\"\u003eMiracle Touch Up\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/miracle-h-1\"\u003eMiracle H\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/miracle-l\"\u003eMiracle L\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePeptides, vitamin C, niacinamide, HA\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePCL with HA\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePCL 20% + HA 1%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePCL 20%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMain aim\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrightening, even tone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFirmness, texture, repair\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFirmness plus hydration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFirmness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"4\"\u003e5 × 2 mL vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBR and Touch Up are often paired in one plan: one for tone, one for firmness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Miracle Touch BR used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMiracle Touch BR is applied into the skin by a trained professional, using a mesotherapy technique or a microneedling device. It is used on the face, including cheeks, chin and jawline, and on the neck. A course of about six sessions is commonly described. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use supplied with the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow long do results last?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReported results last from around 6 months, with some distributors quoting up to 12. Brightening builds across the course rather than after one visit. Daily sun protection is essential, or pigment returns quickly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Miracle Touch BR be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore at room temperature, between 1 and 30 °C, away from direct sunlight. Do not freeze. Check the expiry date on the box and use an opened vial straight away.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Miracle Touch BR from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship original boxes worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e, or browse more \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eKorean skin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMiracle Touch BR FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does BR stand for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBrightening. It is the pigmentation-focused product in the Miracle range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many vials are in a box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFive vials of 2 mL each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Miracle Touch BR contain PCL?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Its listed actives are peptides, vitamin C, niacinamide and hyaluronic acid.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be combined with Miracle Touch Up?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the two are commonly used in the same treatment plan. The clinician sets the schedule.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order Miracle Touch BR wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883053306138,"sku":null,"price":86.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/Screenshot2025-05-17112954.png?v=1747449059"},{"product_id":"miracle-touch-up","title":"Miracle Touch Up","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMiracle Touch Up\u003c\/strong\u003e is a skin booster from the Korean Miracle range, based on biodegradable polycaprolactone (PCL) with hyaluronic acid. Each box holds 5 vials of 2 mL. It is used on mature, sun-damaged or uneven skin to support firmness, hydration and smoother texture.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTouch Up is the repair-and-firmness product in the range. For pigmentation, see \u003ca href=\"\/products\/miracle-touch-br\"\u003eMiracle Touch BR\u003c\/a\u003e. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Miracle Touch Up made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMiracle Touch Up combines a PCL polymer with moisture-binding ingredients. The listed ingredients are polycaprolactone, sodium hyaluronate, glycerin, polyethylene glycol and sodium pyroglutamic acid.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PCL percentage is not published for this product, so we do not quote one. Check the box and insert for the full ingredient list.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Miracle Touch Up used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is used to improve skin quality rather than to add volume. Clinics choose it for fine lines, loss of firmness, dry skin, uneven texture, and marks left by acne. The hyaluronic acid hydrates early on. The PCL then supports new collagen over time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMiracle Touch Up vs the rest of the Miracle range\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePick by the main concern: firmness, tone or hydration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMiracle Touch Up\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/miracle-touch-br\"\u003eMiracle Touch BR\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/miracle-h-1\"\u003eMiracle H\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/miracle-l\"\u003eMiracle L\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePCL with HA\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePeptides, vitamin C, niacinamide, HA\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePCL 20% + HA 1%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePCL 20%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMain aim\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFirmness, texture, repair\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrightening, even tone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFirmness plus hydration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFirmness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"4\"\u003e5 × 2 mL vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Miracle Touch Up used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMiracle Touch Up is placed into the dermis of the face by a trained professional, using a mesotherapy technique or a microneedling device. A course of 3–4 sessions about four weeks apart is commonly described. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use supplied with the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow long does Miracle Touch Up last?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReported results last up to about 12 months. Texture and hydration often improve within four weeks of the first session. Firmness builds more slowly as collagen forms. Results vary by patient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Miracle Touch Up be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore at room temperature, between 1 and 30 °C, away from direct sunlight. Do not freeze. Check the expiry date on the box and use an opened vial straight away.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Miracle Touch Up from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship original boxes worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e, or compare other \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/biostimulators\"\u003eKorean biostimulators\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMiracle Touch Up FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Miracle Touch Up a filler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It does not add volume. It is a skin booster that works on firmness and skin quality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many vials are in a box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFive vials of 2 mL each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between Touch Up and Touch BR?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTouch Up is PCL-based and targets firmness and texture. Touch BR is peptide- and vitamin-based and targets pigmentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan Touch Up and Touch BR be used together?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, they are commonly paired in one plan. The clinician sets the schedule.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order Miracle Touch Up wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883053797658,"sku":null,"price":135.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/Screenshot2025-05-17112715.png?v=1747448867"},{"product_id":"rejuner-black-label","title":"Rejuner Black Label","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRejuner Black Label\u003c\/strong\u003e is a liquid polycaprolactone (PCL) collagen stimulator made by NOHTUS Co., Ltd. in South Korea. Each box holds 5 vials of 2 mL. It contains 23% particle-free, solubilised PCL and is the Rejuner version positioned for thin, delicate skin such as the temples, under-eye area and neck.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is used to improve firmness, fine lines and skin texture by supporting the skin's own collagen. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRejuner Black, Gold or Red Label — which one do you need?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose by PCL strength and by the area you treat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBlack Label\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuner-gold-label\"\u003eGold Label\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuner-red-label\"\u003eRed Label\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePCL\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e23%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e23%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12.5%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePositioned for\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThin skin: temples, under-eye, neck\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWhole face\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWhole face, lighter correction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReported duration\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 24 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 24 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"3\"\u003e5 × 2 mL vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Rejuner Black Label made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRejuner Black Label contains 23% polycaprolactone in a particle-free colloid. PCL is a biodegradable polymer. In older PCL products it comes as solid microspheres. Here it is solubilised into a liquid, so there are no beads to clump under thin skin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow does Rejuner Black Label work?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt works by collagen stimulation, not by filling. After placement in the dermis, the PCL breaks down slowly and prompts fibroblasts to make new collagen. Skin becomes firmer and smoother over the following weeks, with changes described at 4, 8 and 12 weeks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Rejuner Black Label used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is injected into the dermis by a trained professional. The liquid passes through a 33G–34G needle and can also be used with a mesotherapy injector. A course of about three sessions, roughly a month apart, is commonly described. The clinician sets the volume per area. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow long does Rejuner Black Label last?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReported results last up to 24 months, depending on the patient and the protocol. The effect builds gradually, so patients should not expect an instant change.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Rejuner Black Label be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore at room temperature, away from direct sunlight, as printed on the box. Do not freeze. Slight settling in the vial is normal for this colloid. Use an opened vial straight away.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Rejuner Black Label from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship original boxes worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e, or compare other \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/biostimulators\"\u003eKorean biostimulators\u003c\/a\u003e such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/miracle-l\"\u003eMiracle L\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRejuner Black Label FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Rejuner?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNOHTUS Co., Ltd., South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between Black Label and Gold Label?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth contain 23% PCL. Black Label is positioned for thin skin such as temples, under-eye and neck. Gold Label is positioned for the whole face.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many vials are in a box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFive vials of 2 mL each, 10 mL in total.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Rejuner a filler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a liquid collagen stimulator and does not add immediate volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it contain lidocaine?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Many clinics apply a \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/anesthetics-ointments\"\u003enumbing cream\u003c\/a\u003e first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883055829274,"sku":null,"price":247.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/RejunerBlackLabel.webp?v=1696055044"},{"product_id":"rejuner-gold-label","title":"Rejuner Gold Label","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRejuner Gold Label\u003c\/strong\u003e is a liquid polycaprolactone (PCL) collagen stimulator made by NOHTUS Co., Ltd. in South Korea. Each box holds 5 vials of 2 mL. It contains 23% particle-free, solubilised PCL and is the Rejuner version positioned for whole-face treatment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is used to improve firmness, lines and skin texture by supporting the skin's own collagen. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRejuner Gold, Black or Red Label — which one do you need?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose by PCL strength and by the area you treat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGold Label\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuner-black-label\"\u003eBlack Label\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuner-red-label\"\u003eRed Label\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePCL\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e23%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e23%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12.5%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePositioned for\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWhole face\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThin skin: temples, under-eye, neck\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWhole face, lighter correction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReported duration\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 24 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 24 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"3\"\u003e5 × 2 mL vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Rejuner Gold Label made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRejuner Gold Label contains 23% polycaprolactone in a particle-free colloid. PCL is a biodegradable polymer. Instead of solid microspheres, the PCL is solubilised into a liquid, which spreads evenly and does not form beads under the skin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow does Rejuner Gold Label work?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt works by collagen stimulation, not by filling. After placement in the dermis, the PCL breaks down slowly and prompts fibroblasts to make new collagen. Skin becomes firmer and smoother over the following weeks and months.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhich areas is Rejuner Gold Label used on?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGold Label is used across the face. Areas described include the forehead, temples, cheeks, nasolabial folds, marionette lines, nose, jawline and chin. For very thin skin, such as under the eyes, \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuner-black-label\"\u003eBlack Label\u003c\/a\u003e is the version positioned for that work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Rejuner Gold Label used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is injected into the dermis by a trained professional. The liquid passes through a 33G–34G needle and can also be used with a mesotherapy injector. A course of about three sessions, roughly a month apart, is commonly described. The clinician sets the volume per area. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow long does Rejuner Gold Label last?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReported results last up to 24 months, depending on the patient and the protocol. The effect builds gradually rather than showing at once.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Rejuner Gold Label be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore at room temperature, away from direct sunlight, as printed on the box. Do not freeze. Slight settling in the vial is normal for this colloid. Use an opened vial straight away.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Rejuner Gold Label from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship original boxes worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e, or compare other \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/biostimulators\"\u003eKorean biostimulators\u003c\/a\u003e such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/miracle-l\"\u003eMiracle L\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRejuner Gold Label FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Rejuner?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNOHTUS Co., Ltd., South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between Gold Label and Red Label?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGold Label has 23% PCL. Red Label has 12.5% PCL and a shorter reported duration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many vials are in a box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFive vials of 2 mL each, 10 mL in total.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Rejuner a filler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a liquid collagen stimulator and does not add immediate volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it contain lidocaine?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Many clinics apply a \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/anesthetics-ointments\"\u003enumbing cream\u003c\/a\u003e first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883056550170,"sku":null,"price":247.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/RejunerGoldLabel.webp?v=1696054942"},{"product_id":"rejuner-red-label","title":"Rejuner Red Label","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRejuner Red Label\u003c\/strong\u003e is a liquid polycaprolactone (PCL) collagen stimulator made by NOHTUS Co., Ltd. in South Korea. Each box holds 5 vials of 2 mL. It contains 12.5% particle-free, solubilised PCL, which makes it the lighter strength in the Rejuner range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is used across the face to improve firmness, fine lines and texture by supporting the skin's own collagen. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRejuner Red, Gold or Black Label — which one do you need?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose by PCL strength and by the area you treat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRed Label\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuner-gold-label\"\u003eGold Label\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuner-black-label\"\u003eBlack Label\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePCL\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12.5%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e23%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e23%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePositioned for\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWhole face, lighter correction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWhole face\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThin skin: temples, under-eye, neck\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReported duration\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 24 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 24 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"3\"\u003e5 × 2 mL vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRed Label is a sensible starting point for younger patients or first-time PCL treatments. Move to Gold when you want the higher strength.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Rejuner Red Label made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRejuner Red Label contains 12.5% polycaprolactone in a particle-free colloid. PCL is a biodegradable polymer. Instead of solid microspheres, it is solubilised into a liquid that spreads evenly in the skin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow does Rejuner Red Label work?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt works by collagen stimulation, not by filling. After placement in the dermis, the PCL breaks down slowly and prompts fibroblasts to make new collagen. Distributors describe first changes at 6–12 weeks and a peak at 3–6 months.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Rejuner Red Label used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is injected into the dermis by a trained professional. The commonly described plan is 2 mL once a month for three sessions. It is used across the face, including forehead, temples, cheeks, nasolabial folds, marionette lines and chin. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSession\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTiming\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReference volume\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeek 0\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeek 4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeek 8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow long does Rejuner Red Label last?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReported results last up to 12 months, depending on the patient and the protocol.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Rejuner Red Label be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore at room temperature, away from direct sunlight, as printed on the box. Do not freeze. Use an opened vial straight away.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Rejuner Red Label from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship original boxes worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e, or compare other \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/biostimulators\"\u003eKorean biostimulators\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRejuner Red Label FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Rejuner?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNOHTUS Co., Ltd., South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much PCL is in Red Label?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e12.5%. Gold Label and Black Label contain 23%.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many vials are in a box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFive vials of 2 mL each, 10 mL in total.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Rejuner a filler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a liquid collagen stimulator and does not add immediate volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it contain lidocaine?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Many clinics apply a \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/anesthetics-ointments\"\u003enumbing cream\u003c\/a\u003e first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883056779546,"sku":null,"price":213.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/RejunerRedLabel.webp?v=1696054704"},{"product_id":"syniro-pdrn","title":"Syniro PDRN","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSyniro PDRN\u003c\/strong\u003e is a skin booster made by BNC Global in South Korea. It combines 2% PDRN (polydeoxyribonucleotide) with 2% high-molecular-weight hyaluronic acid. This listing is for a box of two 2.2 mL pre-filled syringes. Clinics use it to support skin repair and restore moisture in tired or damaged skin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for trade pricing and current stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow does Syniro PDRN compare with other BNC Global boosters?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSyniro PDRN is the choice when you want PDRN and a strong dose of hyaluronic acid in the same syringe.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSyniro PDRN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/elaxen-pdrn\"\u003eElaxen PDRN\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/juve-face\"\u003eJuve Face\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/juve-eyes\"\u003eJuve Eyes\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMain active\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePDRN 2% + HA 2%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePDRN + HA\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePN 2%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMade for\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRepair plus hydration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElasticity and hydration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFace, neck, décolleté, hands\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSkin around the eyes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaker\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"4\"\u003eBNC Global, South Korea\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Syniro PDRN made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manufacturer lists two active ingredients:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePDRN 2%\u003c\/strong\u003e — purified DNA fragments. The maker describes them as building blocks for the synthesis of nucleic acids in skin cells.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHigh-molecular-weight hyaluronic acid 2%\u003c\/strong\u003e — holds water in the skin and supports the skin barrier.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSome suppliers also list niacinamide and peptides. We could not confirm these with the manufacturer, so check the full ingredient list on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Syniro PDRN used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manufacturer says the product restores the activity of aged and damaged keratinocytes and fibroblasts. In practice it is used for dry, dull or stressed skin, loss of elasticity, uneven tone and a weak skin barrier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Syniro PDRN used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSyniro PDRN is placed in the skin by a trained professional. Many clinics apply a \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/anesthetics-ointments\"\u003enumbing cream\u003c\/a\u003e first, because the product is placed with many small injections. We do not publish depths or volumes for this product. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use supplied with the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow many sessions does Syniro PDRN need?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePDRN boosters are normally given as a short course followed by maintenance sessions. The manufacturer's instructions and the treating clinician set the number of sessions and the gap between them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Syniro PDRN be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore Syniro PDRN as directed on the box, in its original packaging and away from direct sunlight. Do not freeze. The shelf life is printed on the box. Check the seal and the expiry date before use. Each syringe or vial is for one patient and one session only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Syniro PDRN from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Compare other PDRN and PN boosters such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/kiara-reju\"\u003eKiara Reju\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran\"\u003eRejuran\u003c\/a\u003e, or browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eskin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSyniro PDRN FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Syniro PDRN?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBNC Global, South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in the box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTwo 2.2 mL pre-filled syringes, as listed for this product. Check the pack details on the box you receive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does PDRN stand for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePolydeoxyribonucleotide — purified DNA fragments used in skin-repair treatments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Syniro PDRN a filler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a skin booster. It improves skin quality and does not add volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between PDRN and PN?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth are DNA fragments. PN chains are longer; PDRN chains are shorter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order Syniro PDRN wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883385278746,"sku":null,"price":100.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/SyniroPDRN.jpg?v=1695973524"},{"product_id":"replengen-fine-1","title":"Replengen Fine","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReplengen Fine\u003c\/strong\u003e is a cross-linked hyaluronic acid (HA) dermal filler made by Reanzen Co., Ltd. in South Korea. Each box holds one 1.1 mL pre-filled syringe with 24 mg\/mL HA and 0.3% lidocaine, plus two 30G needles. It is the softest gel in the Replengen facial range and is used for fine, shallow lines.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for trade pricing and current stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eReplengen Fine, Deep or Volume — which one do you need?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose by depth. The softer the gel, the closer to the surface it goes. Replengen Fine is the softest option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFine\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/replengen-deep-1\"\u003eDeep\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/replengen-volume-1\"\u003eVolume\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGel\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFirm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUsed for\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFine lines around eyes, mouth, forehead, neck\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModerate to deep wrinkles, lips, facial volume\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDeep wrinkles, volume, facial contour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNeedles in the box\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 × 30G\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 × 27G\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 × 25G\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGel firmness (maker's data)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e—\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150–210 Pa\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e260–300 Pa\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHA \/ lidocaine\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"3\"\u003e24 mg\/mL cross-linked hyaluronic acid, 0.3% lidocaine, 1.1 mL syringe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor body work, Replengen also comes as 10 mL syringes: \u003ca href=\"\/products\/replengen-21\"\u003eReplengen 20\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/products\/replengen-41\"\u003eReplengen 40\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Replengen Fine made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReplengen Fine is cross-linked, non-animal hyaluronic acid at 24 mg\/mL with 0.3% lidocaine (3 mg\/mL). Reanzen names two process steps. HAMC (Hyaluronic Acid Moisture Correction) is described as raising the cross-linking rate so the gel breaks down more slowly. GI (Grinding Irregular) cuts the gel into fine, even particles so it flows smoothly through the needle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe lidocaine in the gel eases discomfort during injection. For sensitive areas, many clinics also apply a \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/anesthetics-ointments\"\u003enumbing cream\u003c\/a\u003e first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat does Replengen Fine treat?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReplengen Fine is the soft gel for thin skin. Typical uses are crow's feet, fine forehead lines, neck lines and fine lines around the mouth. It spreads evenly, which lowers the risk of visible lumps near the surface. It is too soft to build structure in the cheeks or chin; use Deep or Volume there.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Replengen Fine used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReplengen Fine is placed in the superficial dermis with the 30G needles supplied. Inject slowly and in small amounts. Because the gel is hyaluronic acid, placement can be corrected with hyaluronidase such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/liporase-inj\"\u003eLiporase\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eHow long does Replengen Fine last?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSupplier data sheets for the Replengen facial gels cite about 6 to 12 months. Some distributors quote longer for the firmer gels, but we have not confirmed that with the manufacturer. The real figure depends on the area, the amount used and the patient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Replengen Fine be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore Replengen Fine between 2 and 25 °C, away from direct sunlight. Do not freeze. Shelf life is 24 months from manufacture — check the date on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Replengen Fine from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Compare other \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/dermal-fillers\"\u003eKorean dermal fillers\u003c\/a\u003e such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/revolax\"\u003eRevolax\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/products\/voluderm\"\u003eVoluderm\u003c\/a\u003e. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eReplengen Fine FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Replengen?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReanzen Co., Ltd., South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in the box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne 1.1 mL pre-filled syringe and two 30G needles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Replengen Fine contain lidocaine?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, 0.3% lidocaine is mixed into the gel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Replengen Fine right for lip volume?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt suits fine lines around the mouth. For lip volume, Replengen Deep is the usual choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow long does Replengen Fine last?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSupplier data cites about 6 to 12 months, depending on the area and patient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan Replengen be dissolved?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It is hyaluronic acid, so hyaluronidase breaks it down.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883386392858,"sku":null,"price":30.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/ReplengenFine.jpg?v=1696141114"},{"product_id":"snow-flower-bloom","title":"Snow Flower Bloom","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSnow Flower Bloom\u003c\/strong\u003e is a professional skin booster from South Korea that combines three well-known ingredients: PDRN (salmon DNA), hyaluronic acid and glutathione. Each box holds 5 vials of 2.5 mL. Clinics use it in skin booster and mesotherapy-style treatments for dull, dry or tired-looking facial skin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne vial is used per session, so a box covers a typical five-session course. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Snow Flower Bloom made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSnow Flower Bloom has three main ingredients, each with a different job.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eIngredient\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat it is\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhy it is included\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePDRN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolydeoxyribonucleotide, purified DNA fragments from salmon\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSkin conditioning and support for skin renewal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHyaluronic acid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eA water-binding sugar found naturally in skin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydration and a plumper, smoother surface\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGlutathione\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAn antioxidant tripeptide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eA brighter, more even-looking tone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the box label for the full ingredient list and concentrations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Snow Flower Bloom used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSnow Flower Bloom is used for skin that looks dull, dehydrated or uneven. Practitioners choose it when they want hydration and brightening care in the same product, rather than a single-ingredient booster. It is used on the face, including the forehead, cheeks and chin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Snow Flower Bloom used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSnow Flower Bloom is for professional use only. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use supplied with the box for the method of application, and work within the rules for your licence and country. Use one vial per client and discard anything left over.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow many sessions are usual?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA course is usually 4 to 5 sessions, spaced two to three weeks apart. Maintenance sessions can follow every few months. Results vary with skin condition, age and aftercare.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow does it compare with other PDRN boosters?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSnow Flower Bloom adds glutathione to the PDRN and hyaluronic acid base, so its focus leans towards tone and glow. If you want a polynucleotide-led product, look at \u003ca href=\"\/products\/ultra-reju\"\u003eUltra Reju\u003c\/a\u003e (PN + PDRN), \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran\"\u003eRejuran\u003c\/a\u003e or \u003ca href=\"\/products\/kiara-reju\"\u003eKiara Reju\u003c\/a\u003e. For a brightening-led formula with peptides, see \u003ca href=\"\/products\/ultra-white\"\u003eUltra White\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Snow Flower Bloom be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore the box in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight. Do not freeze. The expiry date is printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Snow Flower Bloom from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e or browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eKorean skin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use by trained, licensed practitioners only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSnow Flower Bloom FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in a box of Snow Flower Bloom?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFive vials of 2.5 mL each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the main ingredients?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePDRN (salmon DNA), hyaluronic acid and glutathione.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many sessions are in a course?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsually 4 to 5, two to three weeks apart.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich areas is it used on?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe face, including forehead, cheeks and chin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order it wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883396223258,"sku":null,"price":86.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/SnowFlowerBloom.jpg?v=1696054594"},{"product_id":"ultra-reju","title":"Ultra Reju","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eUltra Reju\u003c\/strong\u003e is a professional skin booster from the Korean brand CosmoDerma. It pairs two DNA-derived ingredients — polynucleotides (PN) and polydeoxyribonucleotides (PDRN) — in one solution. Each box holds 5 vials of 3 mL. Clinics use it in facial skin rejuvenation treatments for skin that looks thin, dry, lined or uneven.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne vial is used per session. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e on box quantities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Ultra Reju made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUltra Reju is built on two related ingredients, both made from purified fish DNA.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eIngredient\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eListed strength\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat it is\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolynucleotides (PN)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLonger DNA chains that hold water and give the solution its body\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolydeoxyribonucleotides (PDRN)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShorter DNA fragments widely used in Korean skin boosters for skin renewal care\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStrengths are as listed for the product; check the box label for the full ingredient list.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePN vs PDRN — what is the difference?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePN and PDRN are the same kind of molecule in different chain lengths. PN chains are longer and more viscous, so they are linked with hydration and skin texture. PDRN fragments are shorter and are linked with skin conditioning and recovery care. Ultra Reju combines both instead of offering only one.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Ultra Reju used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUltra Reju is used for general facial skin quality: fine lines, loss of bounce, rough texture, visible pores and dull tone. It is used on the forehead, cheeks, chin and around the eyes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Ultra Reju used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUltra Reju is for professional use only. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use supplied with the box for the method of application, and work within the rules for your licence and country. Use one vial per client and discard anything left over.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA course is commonly three sessions, two to three weeks apart, with maintenance every 6 to 12 months. Results vary with skin condition, age and aftercare.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUltra Reju vs Ultra White — which one?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose Ultra Reju for skin quality and recovery care, and Ultra White when tone and pigmentation are the main concern. Both are CosmoDerma boosters in 5 × 3 mL boxes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUltra Reju\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/ultra-white\"\u003eUltra White\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFocus\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRejuvenation, texture, elasticity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrightening, uneven tone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eKey ingredients\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePN and PDRN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePeptides, glutathione, vitamin C, niacinamide, arbutin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mL × 5 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mL × 5 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOther polynucleotide options we stock include \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran\"\u003eRejuran\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/products\/kiara-reju\"\u003eKiara Reju\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Ultra Reju be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore the box in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight. Do not freeze. The expiry date is printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Ultra Reju from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e or browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eKorean skin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use by trained, licensed practitioners only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUltra Reju FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in a box of Ultra Reju?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFive vials of 3 mL each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the main ingredients?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePolynucleotides (PN) and polydeoxyribonucleotides (PDRN).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many sessions are in a course?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCommonly three, two to three weeks apart.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich areas is it used on?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe face, including forehead, cheeks, chin and the eye area.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order it wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883396354330,"sku":null,"price":106.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/UltraReju.jpg?v=1696054451"},{"product_id":"ultra-white","title":"Ultra White","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eUltra White\u003c\/strong\u003e is a professional brightening skin booster from the Korean brand CosmoDerma. It is a multi-ingredient solution of peptides, antioxidants and vitamins, supplied as 5 vials of 3 mL per box. Clinics use it in skin booster treatments for dull tone, dark spots and uneven-looking skin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne vial is used per session. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e on box quantities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Ultra White made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUltra White combines tone-care ingredients with peptides and hydrators. The formula lists the following.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGroup\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eIngredients\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhy they are included\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTone care\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTranexamoyl dipeptide-23, glutathione, vitamin C, arbutin, niacinamide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor a brighter, more even-looking tone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePeptides\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOligopeptide-2, polypeptide-1, tetrapeptide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSkin conditioning and a firmer feel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRepair and moisture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSodium DNA, N-acetyl glucosamine, pantothenic acid (vitamin B5)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydration and comfort\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the box label for the full ingredient list and order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Ultra White used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUltra White is used when uneven tone is the main concern: dullness, dark spots, marks left after blemishes and a tired look around the eyes. It is used on the full face, including the chin and eye area.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Ultra White used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUltra White is for professional use only. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use supplied with the box for the method of application, and work within the rules for your licence and country. Use one vial per client and discard anything left over.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBrightening care takes time. A course is commonly at least six sessions over about three months, followed by maintenance every two to six months. Daily sunscreen matters as much as the treatment itself, because sun exposure brings pigmentation back.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUltra White vs Ultra Reju — which one?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose Ultra White when tone and pigmentation come first, and Ultra Reju for overall skin quality. Both are CosmoDerma boosters in 5 × 3 mL boxes, and some clinics alternate them in one plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUltra White\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/ultra-reju\"\u003eUltra Reju\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFocus\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrightening, uneven tone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRejuvenation, texture, elasticity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eKey ingredients\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePeptides, glutathione, vitamin C, niacinamide, arbutin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePN and PDRN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mL × 5 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mL × 5 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAnother glutathione-based option in our range is \u003ca href=\"\/products\/snow-flower-bloom\"\u003eSnow Flower Bloom\u003c\/a\u003e, which adds PDRN and hyaluronic acid.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Ultra White be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore the box in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight. Do not freeze. Vitamin C and glutathione are sensitive to heat and light, so keep vials in the box until use. The expiry date is printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Ultra White from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e or browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eKorean skin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use by trained, licensed practitioners only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUltra White FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in a box of Ultra White?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFive vials of 3 mL each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the main brightening ingredients?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTranexamoyl dipeptide-23, glutathione, vitamin C, arbutin and niacinamide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many sessions are in a course?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCommonly at least six over about three months.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich areas is it used on?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe full face, including the chin and eye area.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order it wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883396550938,"sku":null,"price":96.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/UltraWhite.jpg?v=1696053996"},{"product_id":"velatox-gf11","title":"Velatox GF11","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVelatox GF11\u003c\/strong\u003e is a professional skin booster from South Korea built around 11 cell growth factors, peptides and vitamin C. Each box holds 5 vials of 3 mL Velatox and 2 vials of 10 mL Velasem, a soothing after-treatment solution. Velatox is applied to the skin and worked in with a micro-needle therapy system (MTS). It is not an injectable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSkin clinics and beauticians use it for fine lines, loss of firmness and dull tone. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Velatox GF11 made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVelatox GF11 is a water-based solution of growth factors and peptides. The formula lists:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGrowth factors:\u003c\/strong\u003e a complex of 11, including EGF and FGF.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePeptides:\u003c\/strong\u003e acetyl hexapeptide-8, palmitoyl pentapeptide-4 and copper tripeptide-1.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOther ingredients:\u003c\/strong\u003e adenosine, arginine, vitamin C and arbutin.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAcetyl hexapeptide-8 is the peptide often used in cosmetics for expression lines, which is where the \"tox\" in the name comes from. Velatox contains no botulinum toxin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is in the box?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSize\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eJob\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVelatox\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mL × 5 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrowth factor and peptide solution used with MTS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVelasem\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 mL × 2 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoothing moisturiser applied after MTS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne Velatox vial is one treatment, so a box covers five sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Velatox GF11 used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVelatox is applied in two layers with MTS in between, then finished with Velasem.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003col\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCleanse the face.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApply a generous layer of Velatox and wait 1 to 3 minutes for it to absorb.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApply the solution again and treat the area with MTS.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApply about 3 mL of Velasem to calm and rehydrate the skin.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDo not use more than one vial per treatment. Do not use Velatox on wounded skin, eczema or dermatitis.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow often is Velatox GF11 repeated?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe usual spacing is one session every two weeks. Clinics commonly plan a course of 4 to 6 sessions and then repeat as needed. Results vary with skin condition and home care.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Velatox GF11 be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore the box at room temperature (1–30 °C), away from direct sunlight. Once a Velasem vial is opened, keep it in the fridge and use it within one week. The expiry date is printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Velatox GF11 from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to clinics, skin professionals and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e or compare other \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eKorean skin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e. For the scalp, the same product family offers \u003ca href=\"\/products\/velash\"\u003eVelash\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use by trained practitioners only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVelatox GF11 FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Velatox GF11 a botulinum toxin?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a cosmetic growth factor and peptide solution with no botulinum toxin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Velatox injected?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is applied to the skin and used with a micro-needle therapy system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is Velasem?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is the soothing solution in the box, applied after the MTS step.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many treatments are in one box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFive, at one 3 mL vial per session.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich areas can be treated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe face, including forehead, eye area, cheeks and chin, and the neck.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883396616474,"sku":null,"price":90.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/VelatoxGF11.webp?v=1696053899"},{"product_id":"soonsu-aqua-cream","title":"Soonsu Aqua Cream","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSoonsu Aqua Cream\u003c\/strong\u003e is a moisturising cream from the Korean professional skin care brand Soonsu, supplied in a 50 mL tube. It is a water-in-silicone formula with sodium hyaluronate, hydrolysed collagen, niacinamide and a blend of plant extracts. The texture is light and non-sticky, so it works as a daily moisturiser and as a finishing cream after salon treatments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is used on the face, neck, décolleté and hands. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e if you want it for retail or treatment-room use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Soonsu Aqua Cream made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSoonsu Aqua Cream pairs water-binding ingredients with soothing plant extracts in a silicone-based cream.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eIngredient\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat it does\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSodium hyaluronate (hyaluronic acid)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBinds water and keeps the skin surface hydrated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydrolysed collagen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFilm-forming moisturiser that leaves skin feeling supple\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNiacinamide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHelps even the look of skin tone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBetaine and arginine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHumectants that support the skin's moisture balance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMacadamia seed oil\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLight emollient oil\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlant extracts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChamomile, purslane, algae, witch hazel water, green tea, lavender and grapefruit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe full ingredient list is printed on the tube. Check it for clients with known sensitivities to fragrance or plant extracts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat does \"water-in-silicone\" mean?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt means tiny water droplets are held inside a silicone base. The silicone spreads easily and leaves a thin, breathable layer on the skin that slows water loss. The result is a cream that feels light and dry to the touch rather than greasy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Soonsu Aqua Cream used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eApply a small amount to clean skin morning and evening, and smooth it in until absorbed. Use sunscreen over it during the day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the treatment room, it is commonly used as the last step after a peel, once the skin has been rinsed and dried. It pairs with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/soonsu-shining-peel\"\u003eSoonsu Shining Peel\u003c\/a\u003e from the same brand, and with other professional peels such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/bienpeel\"\u003eBienpeel\u003c\/a\u003e or \u003ca href=\"\/products\/curenex-snow-peel\"\u003eCurenex Snow Peel\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho is Soonsu Aqua Cream for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt suits dry, dehydrated or tight-feeling skin, and skin that needs a simple moisturiser during a course of peels. Because it is light, it also suits combination skin that dislikes heavy creams.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Soonsu Aqua Cream be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeep the tube closed in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight. The expiry date is printed on the tube.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Soonsu Aqua Cream from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to clinics, beauty professionals and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you place the order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e or browse more \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/peels-skincare\"\u003eprofessional peels and skin care\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCosmetic product for external use only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSoonsu Aqua Cream FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat size is Soonsu Aqua Cream?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne 50 mL tube.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it sticky?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The water-in-silicone base gives a light, non-sticky finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used after a peel?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, as a finishing moisturiser once the peel has been rinsed off. Follow the peel maker's aftercare advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on the hands?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It can be used on the face, neck, décolleté and hands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it contain sunscreen?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Apply a separate sunscreen during the day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883396780314,"sku":null,"price":10.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/SoonsuAquaCream.png?v=1696049303"},{"product_id":"soonsu-shining-peel","title":"Soonsu Shining Peel","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSoonsu Shining Peel\u003c\/strong\u003e is a two-phase (biphasic) professional chemical peel from South Korea with 35% trichloroacetic acid (TCA). Each box holds 5 vials of 6 mL. A water phase carries the acids, vitamins and amino acids, and an oil phase with squalane protects the actives from oxidation and leaves a moisture film on the skin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClinics and trained skin therapists use it for dull tone, post-acne marks, enlarged pores and rough texture on the face and body. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Soonsu Shining Peel made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSoonsu Shining Peel combines TCA 35% with three families of milder acids and a set of skin-conditioning ingredients.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAcids:\u003c\/strong\u003e trichloroacetic acid 35%, glycolic acid (AHA), salicylic acid (BHA) and lactobionic acid (PHA).\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVitamins:\u003c\/strong\u003e vitamin B12, vitamin C and retinol.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAmino acids and peptides:\u003c\/strong\u003e arginine, proline, glycine and three peptides.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOil phase:\u003c\/strong\u003e squalane.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Soonsu Shining Peel used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe peel is applied to the skin surface, massaged in and then removed, following the instructions in the box. In general:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003col\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCleanse and degrease the skin.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShake the vial until the oil and water layers blend evenly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWearing gloves, apply a thin layer and massage it in.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLeave it on for the contact time stated in the instructions, then rinse.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish with a moisturiser such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/soonsu-aqua-cream\"\u003eSoonsu Aqua Cream\u003c\/a\u003e and sun protection.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBesides the face, it can be used on the neck, décolleté, hands, elbows and other body areas with rough or uneven skin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow many sessions are needed?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA course is usually 4 to 6 sessions, 7 to 12 days apart. Visible change is typically reported after the third session. Results vary with skin type and aftercare.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSoonsu Shining Peel vs Bienpeel — what is the difference?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth are Korean two-phase TCA 35% peels in 5 × 6 mL boxes. They differ in the supporting formula.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSoonsu Shining Peel\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/bienpeel\"\u003eBienpeel\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTCA\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOther acids\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAHA, BHA and PHA blend\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLactobionic, salicylic, tartaric, citric\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eExtras\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVitamins C and B12, retinol, amino acids, peptides\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVitamins C and B2, GABA, amino acids\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUsual course\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4–6 sessions, 7–12 days apart\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4–7 sessions, 7–10 days apart\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause Soonsu Shining Peel contains retinol, it is not a choice for pregnant or breastfeeding clients.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Soonsu Shining Peel be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore vials upright and closed in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight. The expiry date is printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Soonsu Shining Peel from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship original boxes worldwide from Seoul to clinics, skin professionals and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e or browse more \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/peels-skincare\"\u003eprofessional peels and skin care\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use by trained practitioners only. Not for home use.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSoonsu Shining Peel FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat strength is Soonsu Shining Peel?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt contains 35% trichloroacetic acid in a two-phase formula.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many vials are in a box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFive vials of 6 mL each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on the body?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It is used on the face, neck, décolleté, hands and elbows.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow often can it be repeated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery 7 to 12 days, for 4 to 6 sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat should clients avoid after a session?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSun exposure, scrubs and other acid or retinoid products for several days. Daily sunscreen is essential.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883397107994,"sku":null,"price":112.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/SoonsuShiningPeel.jpg?v=1696049064"},{"product_id":"cindella-inj","title":"Cindella Inj","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCindella Inj\u003c\/strong\u003e is a thioctic acid injection made by Daehan New Pharm Co., Ltd. in South Korea. Each 5 mL ampoule holds 25 mg of thioctic acid, also called alpha-lipoic acid. A box holds 10 ampoules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCindella is a prescription-type injectable. This page covers composition, pack and storage. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eAsk us about trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e for volume orders.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Cindella Inj made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCindella has one active ingredient: thioctic acid, 25 mg in 5 mL, which is 5 mg per mL. Thioctic acid is a sulphur-containing fatty acid that the body also makes in small amounts. The excipients are listed on the box and in the insert.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eItem\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eActive\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThioctic acid (alpha-lipoic acid) 25 mg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVolume\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mL per ampoule\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConcentration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mg\/mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 ampoules per box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDaehan New Pharm Co., Ltd., South Korea\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCindella vs Lipotocin — what is the difference?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth are thioctic acid injections, but the strength is very different. Lipotocin carries 300 mg per ampoule as the tromethamine salt, twelve times the amount in one Cindella ampoule. They are not interchangeable ampoule for ampoule.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCindella Inj\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/lipotocin\"\u003eLipotocin\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eActive\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThioctic acid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThioctic acid tromethamine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThioctic acid per ampoule\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 mg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mg (476.4 mg as the tromethamine salt)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAmpoule volume\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConcentration\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mg\/mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 mg\/mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePack\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 ampoules\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 ampoules\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Cindella Inj used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manufacturer lists Cindella for supplementation when the body's demand for thioctic acid is increased. You may know it by the nickname \"Cinderella injection\". We do not make whitening, weight-loss or anti-ageing claims for it; the prescribing clinician decides whether it is suitable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Cindella Inj dosed?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDosing follows the product insert and the prescribing clinician. We do not publish dose, frequency or course length for prescription-type injectables, and nothing on this page replaces the insert in the box. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Cindella Inj be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore Cindella at room temperature, 1–30 °C, in its carton. Thioctic acid breaks down in light, so keep the ampoules in the box until the moment of use. Shelf life is as printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat should clinics check before use?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDo not use Cindella in a patient with a known allergy to thioctic acid. Thioctic acid can lower blood sugar, so take care with patients on diabetes medicine. Inspect each ampoule and discard any that is cloudy or damaged. Follow the precautions in the insert.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Cindella Inj from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship Cindella Inj worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you place the order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e, browse our other \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/vitamins-injectables\"\u003evitamin and nutrient injectables\u003c\/a\u003e, or \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e. Clinics often stock it with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/luthione-inj-1200mg\"\u003eLuthione 1200mg\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/products\/dhnp-vitamin-c-inj\"\u003eDHNP Vitamin C Inj.\u003c\/a\u003e from the same manufacturer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCindella Inj FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Cindella Inj?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDaehan New Pharm Co., Ltd., South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much thioctic acid is in one ampoule?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e25 mg in 5 mL.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs thioctic acid the same as alpha-lipoic acid?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. They are two names for the same substance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many ampoules are in a box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTen ampoules of 5 mL each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow is Cindella dosed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDosing follows the product insert and the prescribing clinician.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883657416986,"sku":null,"price":36.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/CindellaInj.jpg?v=1696052436"},{"product_id":"curacen-inj","title":"Curacen Inj","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCuracen Inj\u003c\/strong\u003e is a human placenta extract injection made by Japan Bio Products Co., Ltd. (JBP) in Japan. It comes in 2 mL glass ampoules. Aesthetic doctors use it in mesotherapy for tired, dull and ageing skin on the face, neck and décolleté.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePack sizes vary by batch, so \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e to confirm the number of ampoules per box and for trade pricing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Curacen made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCuracen is a water-based hydrolysate of human placenta. The extract is broken down into small molecules, so it contains amino acids and low-molecular peptides rather than whole proteins. Supplier information also lists nucleic acids, vitamins and minerals from the source tissue.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amount of extract per ampoule is printed on the box and ampoule label.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Curacen different from Laennec?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth are human placenta products from the same Japanese maker, JBP. Suppliers describe Curacen as the low-molecular version used in aesthetic mesotherapy, with smaller molecules from a different breakdown method.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCuracen\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLaennec\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaker\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJBP, Japan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJBP, Japan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSource\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHuman placenta hydrolysate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHuman placenta hydrolysate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmpoule\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDescribed as\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLow-molecular; skin mesotherapy\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard placenta injection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Curacen used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn aesthetic practice Curacen is injected into the skin in small amounts with a fine needle. Clinics use papular, linear or nappage mesotherapy techniques, depending on the area.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePublished clinic courses range from three to eight sessions, usually one per week. The dose and plan are a medical decision. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho should not have Curacen?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClinics list pregnancy, breastfeeding, cancer, active autoimmune disease, acute infection, clotting disorders, allergy to any ingredient and inflamed skin at the injection site as reasons not to treat. As with any human-derived product, patients should give informed consent first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Curacen be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore as printed on the box, in the original carton and away from light. Check the expiry date. Use an ampoule straight after opening and discard what is left.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Curacen from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Browse our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/vitamins-injectables\"\u003evitamins and injectables\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eskin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCuracen FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Curacen?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eJapan Bio Products Co., Ltd. (JBP), Japan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the active ingredient?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHuman placenta hydrolysate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow big is one ampoule?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e2 mL.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Curacen a filler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a mesotherapy solution and does not add volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many sessions are usual?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClinic courses range from three to eight weekly sessions. The treating doctor decides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883659219226,"sku":null,"price":78.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/CuracenInj.png?v=1696051553"},{"product_id":"curenex","title":"Curenex","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCurenex\u003c\/strong\u003e Intense Glow \u0026amp; Shine is a Korean PDRN skin booster ampoule. Each box holds five 5 mL vials. The formula combines salmon-derived PDRN with a 15-peptide complex, hyaluronic acid, glutathione and collagen. Professionals use it for dull, dry or uneven skin on the face, neck and décolleté.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis is the original Curenex skin booster, often called the \"Curenex ampoule\". \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for trade pricing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Curenex made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCurenex has five groups of ingredients, each with one job.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePDRN\u003c\/strong\u003e — DNA fragments from salmon, used to support skin repair.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e15 peptides\u003c\/strong\u003e — a multi-peptide complex that supports firmness.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHyaluronic acid\u003c\/strong\u003e — holds water in the skin.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGlutathione\u003c\/strong\u003e — an antioxidant used for brighter, more even tone.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCollagen\u003c\/strong\u003e — a skin-conditioning protein.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExact amounts are printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhich Curenex product do you need?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose this ampoule for an in-clinic glow treatment. The other Curenex products cover the eye area and daily care.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCurenex Glow \u0026amp; Shine\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCurenex Eye\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCurenex Dailycare\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mL vials, 5 per box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mL pre-filled syringe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 mL bottle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eKey ingredients\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePDRN, 15 peptides, HA, glutathione, collagen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePN 1%, HA 1%, lidocaine 0.3%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePDRN, peptides, glutathione, HA\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUsed by\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessionals, in clinic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedical injectors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApplied to the skin, clinic or home care\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMain goal\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGlow, tone, hydration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEye area, neck, hands\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDaily upkeep between treatments\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor body and face contouring from the same brand, see \u003ca href=\"\/products\/curenex-sculp\"\u003eCurenex Sculp\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Curenex used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCurenex is a professional product. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use for the method of delivery. Supplier information describes it as a booster used in professional skin treatments such as microneedling, with one session taking about 30 minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe do not publish depths or volumes for this product. The practitioner decides the method and the plan for each client.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow many sessions are usual?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSupplier information describes visible results after three to four regular sessions. A common plan is three sessions 10 to 14 days apart, then top-ups about once a month.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePhase\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSessions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGap\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStart\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10–14 days\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTop-up\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1–2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 30 days\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne box of five vials is enough for a full starting course.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Curenex be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore as printed on the box, in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight. Check the expiry date, and use an opened vial for one client only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Curenex from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eKorean skin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCurenex FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in a box of Curenex?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFive vials of 5 mL each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does PDRN do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePDRN is a DNA fragment from salmon that is used to support skin repair and recovery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Curenex a filler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a skin booster ampoule. It does not add volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho should avoid Curenex?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAnyone with a fish or salmon allergy, or with infected or broken skin in the area.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order Curenex wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883659350298,"sku":null,"price":93.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/Curenex.jpg?v=1696050481"},{"product_id":"curenex-snow-peel","title":"Curenex Snow Peel","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCurenex Snow Peel\u003c\/strong\u003e is a two-part professional peel kit from the Korean brand Curenex. Each box holds 4 vials of 1 g C-TOX powder and one 30 mL bottle of Snow Peel Activator. The powder is hydrolysed sponge, which exfoliates by physical action rather than strong acid. The activator adds PDRN, glutathione, niacinamide, gluconolactone, peptides and hyaluronic acid.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou mix one vial of powder with activator just before use and massage it over the skin. One box gives four treatments. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Curenex Snow Peel made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCurenex Snow Peel has two parts that are mixed fresh for each session.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSize\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eKey ingredients\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eJob\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eC-TOX powder\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 g × 4 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydrolysed sponge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifts dead surface cells as it is massaged in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSnow Peel Activator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 mL × 1 bottle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePDRN, glutathione, niacinamide, gluconolactone, multi-peptides, hyaluronic acid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWets the powder and delivers care ingredients\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGluconolactone is a gentle PHA exfoliant. Glutathione and niacinamide are used for a brighter, more even-looking tone, and hyaluronic acid adds moisture.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Curenex Snow Peel different from an acid peel?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCurenex Snow Peel relies mainly on sponge powder and massage instead of a high-strength acid. Acid peels such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/bienpeel\"\u003eBienpeel\u003c\/a\u003e or \u003ca href=\"\/products\/soonsu-shining-peel\"\u003eSoonsu Shining Peel\u003c\/a\u003e use 35% TCA to loosen the surface layer chemically. Snow Peel is the choice when you want exfoliation and brightening care in one step without a TCA peel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Curenex Snow Peel used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe peel is mixed and applied by a trained practitioner. A usual session:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003col\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCleanse the skin thoroughly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAdd Snow Peel Activator to one vial of C-TOX powder up to the marked line and shake until even.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApply the mixture to the treatment area with gentle circular motions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMassage for about 5 to 10 minutes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRemove any residue with a soft sponge or lukewarm water.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish with a calming mask or moisturiser and sunscreen.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFollow the instructions supplied in the box. Mild tingling and redness during and after massage are expected with sponge-based peels and usually settle quickly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow often can it be repeated?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSessions are commonly spaced two to three weeks apart, depending on how the skin tolerates the treatment. Clients should avoid other exfoliating products for at least 48 hours afterwards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Curenex Snow Peel be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore the box in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and do not freeze. Mix only what you need: use the blended powder and activator straight away. The expiry date is printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Curenex Snow Peel from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to clinics, skin professionals and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e or browse more \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/peels-skincare\"\u003eprofessional peels and skin care\u003c\/a\u003e. A light moisturiser such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/soonsu-aqua-cream\"\u003eSoonsu Aqua Cream\u003c\/a\u003e works well as the last step.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use by trained practitioners only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCurenex Snow Peel FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in the box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFour 1 g vials of C-TOX powder and one 30 mL bottle of Snow Peel Activator.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many treatments does one box give?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFour, at one vial of powder per session.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is C-TOX powder?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is hydrolysed sponge powder that exfoliates the skin surface when massaged in.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it contain PDRN?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The formula lists PDRN (salmon DNA) along with glutathione, niacinamide and peptides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs there downtime?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSome clients have mild redness or tingling for a few hours. Sun protection is important afterwards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883660005658,"sku":null,"price":93.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/CurenexSnowPeel.jpg?v=1696048601"},{"product_id":"dhnp-vitamin-c-inj","title":"DHNP Vitamin C Inj.","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDHNP Vitamin C Inj.\u003c\/strong\u003e is a high-strength ascorbic acid injection made by Daehan New Pharm Co., Ltd. in South Korea. Each 20 mL vial holds 10 g of ascorbic acid (vitamin C). A box holds 10 vials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is a prescription-type injectable. This page covers composition, pack and storage. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eAsk us about trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e for volume orders.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is DHNP Vitamin C Inj. made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe active ingredient is ascorbic acid, 10 g in 20 mL. That is 500 mg in every mL. The excipients are listed on the box and in the insert.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eItem\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eActive\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAscorbic acid (vitamin C) 10 g\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVolume\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mL per vial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConcentration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500 mg\/mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 vials per box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDaehan New Pharm Co., Ltd., South Korea\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow strong is one vial?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne vial holds 10,000 mg of vitamin C. This is a concentrated hospital-type product, not a ready-to-use shot. A full box holds 100 g of ascorbic acid in 200 mL.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is DHNP Vitamin C Inj. used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manufacturer lists it for the prevention and treatment of vitamin C deficiency when the body's need for vitamin C is increased. We do not make skin-brightening, immune or anti-ageing claims for it. The prescribing clinician decides whether it is suitable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is DHNP Vitamin C Inj. dosed?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDosing follows the product insert and the prescribing clinician. We do not publish dose, frequency or course length for prescription-type injectables, and nothing on this page replaces the insert in the box. Any dilution is also set by the insert and the clinician.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should DHNP Vitamin C Inj. be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeep the vials refrigerated at 2–8 °C and protected from light, and confirm this against the storage line printed on your box. Ascorbic acid solution darkens as it oxidises, so do not use a vial that has turned clearly yellow-brown. Shelf life is as printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat should clinics check before use?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh-strength vitamin C is not for every patient. Clinicians normally screen for G6PD deficiency, kidney disease and a history of kidney stones before giving large amounts. Do not use it in a patient with a known allergy to any ingredient. Follow the precautions in the insert.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying DHNP Vitamin C Inj. from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship DHNP Vitamin C Inj. worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you place the order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e, browse our other \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/vitamins-injectables\"\u003evitamin and nutrient injectables\u003c\/a\u003e, or \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e. It is often ordered with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/luthione-inj-1200mg\"\u003eLuthione 1200mg\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/products\/cindella-inj\"\u003eCindella Inj\u003c\/a\u003e from the same manufacturer, and with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/saline-20-ml\"\u003eSaline 20 ml\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDHNP Vitamin C Inj. FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes DHNP Vitamin C Inj.?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDaehan New Pharm Co., Ltd., South Korea. DHNP is short for the company name.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much vitamin C is in one vial?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e10 g (10,000 mg) of ascorbic acid in 20 mL.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many vials are in a box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTen vials of 20 mL each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it need to be kept cold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, keep it at 2–8 °C and away from light, and confirm against the storage line on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow is it dosed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDosing follows the product insert and the prescribing clinician.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883661742362,"sku":null,"price":43.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/DHNPVitaminCInj..jpg?v=1695967012"},{"product_id":"elaxen-pdrn","title":"Elaxen PDRN","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eElaxen PDRN\u003c\/strong\u003e is a salmon-DNA skin booster from the Elaxen line of BNC Global, South Korea. It combines PDRN (polydeoxyribonucleotide) with hyaluronic acid in a 2.2 mL pre-filled syringe. Clinics use it to improve skin elasticity, texture and hydration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe number of syringes per box is printed on the pack. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for pack details, trade pricing and current stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow does Elaxen PDRN compare with other BNC Global boosters?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eElaxen PDRN is the PDRN-based member of the Elaxen line. The maker has since added a PN version in a 2.5 mL syringe; this page is for the PDRN product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/syniro-pdrn\"\u003eSyniro PDRN\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElaxen PDRN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/juve-face\"\u003eJuve Face\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/juve-eyes\"\u003eJuve Eyes\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMain active\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePDRN 2% + HA 2%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePDRN + HA\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePN 2%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMade for\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRepair plus hydration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElasticity and hydration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFace, neck, décolleté, hands\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSkin around the eyes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaker\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"4\"\u003eBNC Global, South Korea\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Elaxen PDRN made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eElaxen PDRN is built on two ingredients:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePDRN\u003c\/strong\u003e — purified DNA fragments taken from salmon. Salmon DNA is used because it is very close to human DNA.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHyaluronic acid\u003c\/strong\u003e — holds water in the skin.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExact concentrations are not published in the trade information we could verify. Check the composition printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Elaxen PDRN used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTrade information describes salmon DNA as supporting cell growth and tissue repair, and as improving skin elasticity, texture and hydration. Clinics use it for tired, thin or dry skin and for skin with early loss of firmness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Elaxen PDRN used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eElaxen PDRN is placed in the skin by a trained professional. Many clinics apply a \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/anesthetics-ointments\"\u003enumbing cream\u003c\/a\u003e first, because the product is placed with many small injections. We do not publish depths or volumes for this product. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use supplied with the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow many sessions does Elaxen PDRN need?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePDRN boosters are normally given as a short course followed by maintenance sessions. The manufacturer's instructions and the treating clinician set the number of sessions and the gap between them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Elaxen PDRN be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore Elaxen PDRN as directed on the box, in its original packaging and away from direct sunlight. Do not freeze. The shelf life is printed on the box. Check the seal and the expiry date before use. Each syringe or vial is for one patient and one session only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Elaxen PDRN from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Compare other salmon-DNA boosters such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/kiara-reju\"\u003eKiara Reju\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran\"\u003eRejuran\u003c\/a\u003e, or browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eskin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eElaxen PDRN FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Elaxen PDRN?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is part of the Elaxen line of BNC Global, South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does PDRN stand for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePolydeoxyribonucleotide — purified DNA fragments, here taken from salmon.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Elaxen PDRN the same as Elaxen PN?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Elaxen PN is a later version based on polynucleotide in a 2.5 mL syringe. This page is for Elaxen PDRN.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Elaxen PDRN a filler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a skin booster. It improves skin quality and does not add volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan people with a fish allergy have it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePDRN comes from salmon, so a known fish allergy is a reason not to treat. The treating doctor decides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order Elaxen PDRN wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883666657562,"sku":null,"price":100.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/ElaxenPDRN.webp?v=1696047412"},{"product_id":"elaxen-plla","title":"Elaxen PLLA","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eElaxen PLLA\u003c\/strong\u003e is a needle-free skincare kit from BNC Global in South Korea. It is built around poly-L-lactic acid (PLLA) in a topical ampoule essence, and is applied to the skin — it is not an injectable. Clinics use it as a firming and hydrating step on its own or after procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe kit ships from Seoul in the original box. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is in the Elaxen PLLA kit?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe kit holds everything for a series of applications. Check the contents printed on your box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eItem\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eQuantity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eJob\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePLLA ampoule essence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 vials × 15 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe main treatment liquid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePLLA mist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 bottle × 50 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydrating spray step\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSheet masks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 pieces\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHold the essence on the skin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApplication brush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpreads the essence evenly\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Elaxen PLLA made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe lead ingredient is PLLA, joined by a group of familiar skincare actives. The brand lists:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePoly-L-lactic acid (PLLA)\u003c\/strong\u003e — the signature ingredient of the line.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003esh-Oligopeptide-1, niacinamide and adenosine\u003c\/strong\u003e — for tone, elasticity and fine lines.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSodium hyaluronate, betaine and beta-glucan\u003c\/strong\u003e — for moisture.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCentella asiatica, allantoin and aloe\u003c\/strong\u003e — to calm the skin.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCaffeine\u003c\/strong\u003e — for a tired-looking eye area.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe full ingredient list is printed on each item.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Elaxen PLLA used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eElaxen PLLA is applied to clean skin; nothing is injected. A simple routine is:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003col\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCleanse the skin.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBrush the ampoule essence over the face, neck or hands.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlace a sheet mask over the essence and leave it on as the box directs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish with the mist.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFollow the directions printed on the box for amounts and timing. Clinics often use it after lasers or peels once the clinician agrees the skin is ready.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eElaxen PLLA vs injectable PLLA — what is the difference?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eElaxen PLLA is a cosmetic that works on the skin surface. Injectable PLLA products such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/olidia-365mg\"\u003eOlidia\u003c\/a\u003e or \u003ca href=\"\/products\/mayster-plla\"\u003eMayster PLLA\u003c\/a\u003e are placed under the skin by a clinician and act as collagen stimulators. Do not inject Elaxen PLLA. From the same maker, \u003ca href=\"\/products\/fize-pla\"\u003eFize PLA\u003c\/a\u003e is the injectable option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Elaxen PLLA be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore the kit in a cool, dry place between 1 and 30 °C, away from direct sunlight. Close each item after use and use it before the printed expiry date.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Elaxen PLLA from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to clinics, practitioners and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e. Delivery details are in our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping policy\u003c\/a\u003e, and more professional skincare is under \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/peels-skincare\"\u003epeels and skincare\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor external use only. Do not inject.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eElaxen PLLA FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Elaxen PLLA?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBNC Global, South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Elaxen PLLA injected?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a topical skincare kit applied to the skin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat comes in the kit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThree 15 mL ampoule essences, a 50 mL mist, 10 sheet masks and a brush.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich areas can it be used on?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe face, neck, décolleté and hands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used after a procedure?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMany clinics use it for aftercare. The treating clinician decides when the skin is ready.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883666854170,"sku":null,"price":110.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/ElaxenPLLA.jpg?v=1696048292"},{"product_id":"gtm-gold-cell-5","title":"GTM Gold Cell 5","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGTM Gold Cell 5\u003c\/strong\u003e is a Korean PDRN skin booster from CMED Medical Group. Each box holds ten 3.3 mL vials. The formula is listed as 5% PDRN from salmon DNA with 5% hyaluronic acid and 2% glutathione. Professionals use it for skin recovery, hydration and a brighter, more even tone.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is the lighter of the two strengths and the usual starting point. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for trade pricing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is GTM Gold Cell 5 made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGTM Gold Cell 5 has three listed ingredients.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eIngredient\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eListed amount\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eJob\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePDRN (salmon DNA)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupports skin repair\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHyaluronic acid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHolds water in the skin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGlutathione\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAntioxidant; brighter tone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese figures come from the supplier's product listing. The full ingredient list is printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGTM Gold Cell 5 or 8 — which one?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe only listed difference is the amount of PDRN. Hyaluronic acid, glutathione and pack size are the same.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGTM Gold Cell 5\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/gtm-gold-cell-8\"\u003eGTM Gold Cell 8\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePDRN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHyaluronic acid\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGlutathione\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBox\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.3 mL × 10 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.3 mL × 10 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGood fit for\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFirst courses, maintenance, sensitive skin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTired, sun-worn or scarred skin needing more repair support\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMany clinics stock both: 5 for regular upkeep and 8 for intensive courses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is GTM Gold Cell 5 used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is used on skin that looks dull, dry or uneven, and on skin recovering from acne marks or procedures. PDRN supports repair, hyaluronic acid adds moisture and glutathione works on tone. Treatment areas named in listings are the face, neck, décolleté and hands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is GTM Gold Cell 5 used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFollow the manufacturer's instructions for use. Sources differ on the method of delivery: some describe it as a mesotherapy product and others as a solution applied to the skin. For that reason we do not publish depths, volumes or session plans. The practitioner decides the method and the plan for each client.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should GTM Gold Cell 5 be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight, as printed on the box. Check the seal and expiry date, and use an opened vial for one client only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying GTM Gold Cell 5 from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eKorean skin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e, or compare with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran\"\u003eRejuran Healer\u003c\/a\u003e, a polynucleotide booster. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGTM Gold Cell 5 FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes GTM Gold Cell 5?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCMED Medical Group, South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much is in one box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTen vials of 3.3 mL each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much PDRN is in GTM Gold Cell 5?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe listed strength is 5%.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between Gold Cell 5 and 8?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PDRN strength: 5% or 8%. The rest of the listed formula is the same.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho should avoid it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAnyone with a fish or salmon allergy, or with infected or broken skin in the area.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883670098202,"sku":null,"price":145.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/GTMGoldCell5.jpg?v=1696047637"},{"product_id":"gtm-gold-cell-8","title":"GTM Gold Cell 8","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGTM Gold Cell 8\u003c\/strong\u003e is a Korean PDRN skin booster from CMED Medical Group. Each box holds ten 3.3 mL vials. The formula is listed as 8% PDRN from salmon DNA with 5% hyaluronic acid and 2% glutathione. Professionals use it for skin recovery, hydration and a brighter, more even tone.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is the stronger of the two strengths, chosen when more PDRN per vial is wanted. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for trade pricing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is GTM Gold Cell 8 made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGTM Gold Cell 8 has three listed ingredients.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eIngredient\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eListed amount\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eJob\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePDRN (salmon DNA)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupports skin repair\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHyaluronic acid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHolds water in the skin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGlutathione\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAntioxidant; brighter tone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese figures come from the supplier's product listing. The full ingredient list is printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGTM Gold Cell 8 or 5 — which one?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe only listed difference is the amount of PDRN. Hyaluronic acid, glutathione and pack size are the same.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/gtm-gold-cell-5\"\u003eGTM Gold Cell 5\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGTM Gold Cell 8\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePDRN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHyaluronic acid\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGlutathione\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBox\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.3 mL × 10 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.3 mL × 10 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGood fit for\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFirst courses, maintenance, sensitive skin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTired, sun-worn or scarred skin needing more repair support\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMany clinics stock both: 5 for regular upkeep and 8 for intensive courses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is GTM Gold Cell 8 used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is used on skin that looks dull, dry or uneven, and on skin recovering from acne marks or procedures. PDRN supports repair, hyaluronic acid adds moisture and glutathione works on tone. Treatment areas named in listings are the face, neck, décolleté and hands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is GTM Gold Cell 8 used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFollow the manufacturer's instructions for use. Sources differ on the method of delivery: some describe it as a mesotherapy product and others as a solution applied to the skin. For that reason we do not publish depths, volumes or session plans. The practitioner decides the method and the plan for each client.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should GTM Gold Cell 8 be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight, as printed on the box. Check the seal and expiry date, and use an opened vial for one client only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying GTM Gold Cell 8 from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eKorean skin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e, or compare with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran\"\u003eRejuran Healer\u003c\/a\u003e, a polynucleotide booster. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGTM Gold Cell 8 FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes GTM Gold Cell 8?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCMED Medical Group, South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much is in one box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTen vials of 3.3 mL each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much PDRN is in GTM Gold Cell 8?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe listed strength is 8%.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between Gold Cell 5 and 8?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PDRN strength: 5% or 8%. The rest of the listed formula is the same.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho should avoid it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAnyone with a fish or salmon allergy, or with infected or broken skin in the area.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883670130970,"sku":null,"price":157.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/GTMGoldCell8.jpg?v=1696047744"},{"product_id":"hyaldew-shine-1","title":"HyalDew Shine","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHyalDew Shine\u003c\/strong\u003e is a hyaluronic acid (HA) skin booster in the HyalDew range from BioPlus Co., Ltd., South Korea. Each box holds one 2 mL pre-filled syringe. Clinics use it to improve skin hydration, glow and fine surface lines, not to add volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is the lightest product in the HyalDew family. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for trade pricing and current stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is HyalDew Shine made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHyalDew Shine is a hyaluronic acid gel. Supplier information lists 20 mg\/mL cross-linked HA with 0.3% lidocaine in a fine-particle gel. We have not been able to confirm these figures with the manufacturer, so please check the composition printed on the box you receive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHyalDew Shine vs HyalDew Fine, Mid and All — what is the difference?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShine treats skin quality across an area. The other three HyalDew products are fillers that correct lines and add volume at a set depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHyalDew Shine\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/hyaldew-fine-1\"\u003eHyalDew Fine\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/hyaldew-mid-1\"\u003eHyalDew Mid\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/hyaldew-all-1\"\u003eHyalDew All\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSkin booster\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoft filler\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium filler\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFirm filler\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSyringe\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGoal\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydration, glow, skin texture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFine lines\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFolds and lips\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDeep folds and contour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is HyalDew Shine used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHyalDew Shine is used to refresh dry, dull or tired-looking skin. Hyaluronic acid binds water in the skin, which helps it look smoother and more supple. Typical areas are the face, neck, décolleté and the backs of the hands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt will not fill a deep fold or build a cheek. For that, use a filler from the same range or see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/dermal-fillers\"\u003edermal fillers\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is HyalDew Shine used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHyalDew Shine is administered by a trained clinician following the manufacturer's instructions for use. We do not publish a depth, volume or session plan for this product, because we could not confirm them with the manufacturer. The treating clinician decides the plan for each patient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow long does HyalDew Shine last?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manufacturer's stated duration is not confirmed. Skin boosters are usually given as a short course and then repeated to maintain the result. How long the effect holds depends on skin condition, age and lifestyle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should HyalDew Shine be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore it at room temperature in the original box, away from direct sunlight and heat. Do not freeze. Follow the storage range and expiry date printed on the box, and use each syringe for one patient only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying HyalDew Shine from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship original boxes worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Compare it with other \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eKorean skin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran\"\u003eRejuran\u003c\/a\u003e. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHyalDew Shine FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes HyalDew Shine?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHyalDew is a brand of BioPlus Co., Ltd., South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs HyalDew Shine a filler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a skin booster for hydration and skin quality, not for volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much is in the box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne 2 mL pre-filled syringe.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes HyalDew Shine contain lidocaine?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSupplier information lists 0.3% lidocaine. Check the box of the batch you receive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich areas can be treated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFace, neck, décolleté and hands are the usual areas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order HyalDew Shine wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883674620186,"sku":null,"price":31.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/HyalDewShine.png?v=1696059372"},{"product_id":"juve-eyes","title":"Juve Eyes","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJuve Eyes\u003c\/strong\u003e is a polynucleotide (PN) skin booster for the eye area, made by BNC Global in South Korea. Each box holds one 2 mL pre-filled syringe. The PN is purified from salmon DNA. Clinics use it for thin, tired skin around the eyes — fine lines, dark circles and loss of elasticity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for trade pricing and current stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eJuve Eyes or Juve Face — which one?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose Juve Eyes for the thin skin around the eyes and \u003ca href=\"\/products\/juve-face\"\u003eJuve Face\u003c\/a\u003e for the rest of the face and the body areas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eJuve Eyes\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/juve-face\"\u003eJuve Face\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMade for\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSkin around the eyes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFace, neck, décolleté, hands, stretch marks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eActive\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolynucleotide (PN)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolynucleotide (PN) 2%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack listed\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 × 2 mL syringe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 × 3 mL syringes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaker\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"2\"\u003eBNC Global, South Korea\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Juve Eyes made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eJuve Eyes is based on polynucleotide, a chain of DNA fragments purified from salmon. Suppliers list the strength as 1% PN (10 mg\/mL). We could not confirm this figure with the manufacturer, so check the box of the batch you receive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Juve Eyes used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manufacturer describes it as working on the rebuilding and rejuvenation of the skin around the eyes. It names a triple action — lifting, antioxidant and moisturising — and says the product stimulates collagen synthesis and elastic fibres. Clinics use it for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003efine lines and crow's feet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003edark circles linked to thin skin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003edry, crepey under-eye skin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eearly loss of elasticity\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Juve Eyes used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eJuve Eyes is injected by a doctor trained in eye-area work. The skin here is thin and full of small vessels, so technique matters. We do not publish depths or volumes for the eye area. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use supplied with the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Juve Eyes be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore Juve Eyes as directed on the box, away from direct sunlight, and do not freeze. The manufacturer lists a shelf life of 24 months. Check the seal and expiry date before use. The syringe is for one patient only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Juve Eyes from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eKorean skin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e, or compare with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran\"\u003eRejuran\u003c\/a\u003e. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eJuve Eyes FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Juve Eyes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBNC Global, South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in the box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne 2 mL pre-filled syringe.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does PN mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePolynucleotide — purified DNA fragments, here taken from salmon.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Juve Eyes a tear-trough filler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a skin booster. It works on skin quality and does not fill a hollow.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan Juve Eyes be used on the rest of the face?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manufacturer notes it can also be used on the face, neck and hands. Juve Face is the product made for those areas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order Juve Eyes wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883676160282,"sku":null,"price":45.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/JuveEyes.webp?v=1696050283"},{"product_id":"kiara-reju","title":"Kiara Reju","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKiara Reju\u003c\/strong\u003e is a PDRN skin booster made by BioPlus Co., Ltd. in South Korea. Each box holds three 2.2 mL pre-filled syringes. The solution combines salmon-derived PDRN (5 mg\/mL), hyaluronic acid (20 mg\/mL) and niacinamide (1 mg\/mL). Clinics use it to support skin repair, hydration and a more even tone in one treatment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for trade pricing and current stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Kiara Reju made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKiara Reju has three active ingredients, each with a different job.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eIngredient\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmount\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat it does\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePDRN (polydeoxyribonucleotide)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mg\/mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDNA fragments from salmon that support skin repair\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHyaluronic acid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mg\/mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHolds water in the skin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNiacinamide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 mg\/mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupports a brighter, more even tone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne 2.2 mL syringe therefore holds about 11 mg of PDRN and 44 mg of hyaluronic acid.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Kiara Reju used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is used for skin that is dry, dull, thin or showing early lines. Clinics also use it on sun-damaged skin, uneven tone and shallow acne marks. It is a skin-quality treatment and does not add volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow does Kiara Reju compare with other salmon-DNA boosters?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKiara Reju adds hyaluronic acid and niacinamide to PDRN, so it hydrates and brightens as well as supporting repair. \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran\"\u003eRejuran\u003c\/a\u003e is based on polynucleotide (PN), a longer DNA chain. \u003ca href=\"\/products\/syniro-pdrn\"\u003eSyniro PDRN\u003c\/a\u003e pairs 2% PDRN with 2% hyaluronic acid and has no niacinamide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Kiara Reju used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKiara Reju is injected into the skin in small deposits by a trained professional. Many clinics apply a \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/anesthetics-ointments\"\u003enumbing cream\u003c\/a\u003e first, because the product is placed with many small injections. Depth and volume per point should follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow many sessions does Kiara Reju need?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSuppliers commonly describe a course of three to four sessions, two to three weeks apart. This is not confirmed by the manufacturer. The treating clinician sets the plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Kiara Reju be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore Kiara Reju as directed on the box, in its original packaging and away from direct sunlight. Do not freeze. The shelf life is printed on the box. Check the seal and the expiry date before use. Each syringe or vial is for one patient and one session only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Kiara Reju from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eKorean skin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eKiara Reju FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Kiara Reju?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBioPlus Co., Ltd., South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in the box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThree 2.2 mL pre-filled syringes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much PDRN is in Kiara Reju?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e5 mg\/mL, which is about 11 mg in each 2.2 mL syringe.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Kiara Reju a filler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a skin booster. It improves skin quality and does not add volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan people with a fish allergy have it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePDRN comes from salmon, so a known fish allergy is a reason not to treat. The treating doctor decides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order Kiara Reju wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883676913946,"sku":null,"price":63.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/KiaraReju.webp?v=1696047927"},{"product_id":"laennec-inj","title":"Laennec","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLaennec\u003c\/strong\u003e is a human placenta hydrolysate injection developed by Japan Bio Products Co., Ltd. (JBP). Each 2 mL ampoule holds 112 mg of water-soluble human placenta hydrolysate. In Korea it is supplied through GC Wellbeing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLaennec is a prescription-type injectable. This page covers composition, pack and storage only. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e and current pack sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Laennec made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLaennec has one listed active: human placenta hydrolysate, 112 mg in every 2 mL ampoule. A hydrolysate is placenta tissue that has been broken down into smaller, water-soluble parts such as amino acids and peptides. It is a mixture, not a single molecule.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eItem\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eActive\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHuman placenta hydrolysate 112 mg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVolume\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mL per ampoule\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDeveloper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJapan Bio Products Co., Ltd.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mL ampoules; the count is printed on the box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLaennec vs Melsmon — which one is which?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLaennec is listed as a placenta \u003cem\u003ehydrolysate\u003c\/em\u003e and Melsmon as a placenta \u003cem\u003eextract\u003c\/em\u003e. They come from the same kind of tissue but are made by different companies with different processes, so they are separate medicines.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eActive as listed\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmount per 2 mL\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack on this site\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/melsmon\"\u003eMelsmon\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHuman placenta extract\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 ampoules\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLaennec\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHuman placenta hydrolysate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e112 mg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mL ampoules, count as printed on the box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/jbp-plamon-human-placenta-extract-inj\"\u003eJBP Plamon\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHuman placenta extract\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAs printed on the box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 ampoules\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/plagensia-10a\"\u003ePlagensia 10A\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHuman placenta preparation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAs printed on the ampoule\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 ampoules, no outer box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/placein-m\"\u003ePlacein M\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHuman placenta extract\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAs printed on the box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Laennec used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manufacturer lists Laennec for improving liver function in chronic liver disease. The insert gives the route as subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. We do not make skin, fatigue or anti-ageing claims for it. The prescribing clinician decides whether it is suitable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Laennec dosed?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDosing follows the product insert and the prescribing clinician. We do not publish dose, frequency or course length for prescription-type injectables, and nothing on this page replaces the insert in the box. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Laennec be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore Laennec as printed on the box — normally at room temperature and away from light. Keep the ampoules in the carton until use, and check the expiry date before opening.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat should clinics know before using Laennec?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis is a medicine made from human placenta. Donor screening and heat treatment lower the risk of passing on infection, but they cannot remove it completely. Explain this to the patient and obtain consent before treatment. Record the batch number in the patient file. In some countries people who have received a human placenta injection may no longer donate blood, so raise this at the consultation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Laennec from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship Laennec worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you place the order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e, browse our other \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/vitamins-injectables\"\u003evitamin and nutrient injectables\u003c\/a\u003e, or \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLaennec FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Laennec?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt was developed by Japan Bio Products Co., Ltd. (JBP), Japan. In Korea it is supplied through GC Wellbeing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much active is in one ampoule?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e112 mg of human placenta hydrolysate in 2 mL.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Laennec the same as Melsmon?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. \u003ca href=\"\/products\/melsmon\"\u003eMelsmon\u003c\/a\u003e is a placenta extract with 100 mg per ampoule, from a different manufacturer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many ampoules are in a box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLaennec is packed in boxes of 2 mL ampoules. Ask our team which box size is in stock before you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow is Laennec dosed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDosing follows the product insert and the prescribing clinician.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883677176090,"sku":null,"price":293.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/LaennecInj..jpg?v=1696048017"},{"product_id":"luthione-inj-1200mg","title":"Luthione 1200mg","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLuthione 1200mg\u003c\/strong\u003e is a reduced glutathione injection made by Daehan New Pharm Co., Ltd. in South Korea. Each vial holds 1200 mg of reduced glutathione as a dry powder. A box holds 10 vials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is a prescription-type injectable. This page covers composition, pack and storage. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eAsk us about trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e for volume orders.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Luthione 1200mg made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe active ingredient is reduced glutathione, 1200 mg per vial. Glutathione is a small peptide built from three amino acids: glutamate, cysteine and glycine. \"Reduced\" is the active form, before it has been oxidised. The vial holds a white powder that is dissolved just before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eItem\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eActive\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReduced glutathione 1200 mg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eForm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder for injection, in a vial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 vials per box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDaehan New Pharm Co., Ltd., South Korea\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLuthione 600mg, Luthione 1200mg or Detoxione 1200 — which one?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose by the amount of glutathione per vial. Luthione 1200mg holds twice the glutathione of Luthione 600mg, from the same manufacturer. Detoxione 1200 has the same 1200 mg strength under a different brand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReduced glutathione per vial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaker\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/luthione-600mg\"\u003eLuthione 600mg\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDaehan New Pharm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLuthione 1200mg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1200 mg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDaehan New Pharm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/detoxione-1200-glutathione\"\u003eDetoxione 1200\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1200 mg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSouth Korea\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Luthione 1200mg used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manufacturer lists Luthione for the prevention of nerve damage caused by cisplatin or similar chemotherapy. We do not make whitening, brightening, detox or anti-ageing claims for it. Whether it suits a patient is a decision for the prescribing clinician.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Luthione 1200mg dosed?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDosing follows the product insert and the prescribing clinician. We do not publish dose, frequency or course length for prescription-type injectables, and nothing on this page replaces the insert in the box. The diluent, its volume and the route are also set by the insert.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Luthione 1200mg be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore unopened vials at room temperature, away from direct sunlight. Once the powder is dissolved, use it straight away and do not keep leftover solution. Shelf life is as printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat should clinics check before use?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDo not use it in a patient with a known allergy to glutathione or any ingredient. Check that the powder is white and dry and that the seal is intact. After dissolving, the solution should be clear; discard it if it is cloudy. Follow the precautions in the insert.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Luthione 1200mg from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship Luthione 1200mg worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you place the order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e, browse our other \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/vitamins-injectables\"\u003evitamin and nutrient injectables\u003c\/a\u003e, or \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e. For reconstitution supplies see \u003ca href=\"\/products\/saline-20-ml\"\u003eSaline 20 ml\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLuthione 1200mg FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much glutathione is in one vial of Luthione 1200mg?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e1200 mg of reduced glutathione.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many vials are in a box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTen vials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Luthione 1200mg a liquid or a powder?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA dry powder in a vial. It is dissolved just before use, as the insert describes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDaehan New Pharm Co., Ltd., South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow is it dosed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDosing follows the product insert and the prescribing clinician.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"upkeepskin","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46883677733146,"sku":null,"price":70.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0748\/5053\/3658\/files\/LuthioneInj.1200mg.png?v=1696050153"},{"product_id":"hp-cell","title":"HP Cell Skin Booster (Vitaran I \/ Tox \u0026 Eye Regation)","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHP Cell Skin Booster\u003c\/strong\u003e is a Korean professional skin range listed here in two formats. \u003cstrong\u003eVitaran I\u003c\/strong\u003e is a polynucleotide (PN) gel in a 1 mL pre-filled syringe. \u003cstrong\u003eTox \u0026amp; Eye Regation\u003c\/strong\u003e is a peptide and PDRN solution in a box of five 3 mL vials, made for the eye area and forehead.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePick your type above, or \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVitaran I or Tox \u0026amp; Eye Regation — which one do you need?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThey are two different products, not two strengths of one. Choose by the area and the concern.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eVitaran I\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTox \u0026amp; Eye Regation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 mL pre-filled syringe × 1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mL vial × 5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMain ingredients\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolynucleotide sodium, listed at 20 mg\/mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePDRN, 0.2% hyaluronic acid, pentapeptide-18, acetyl hexapeptide and a wider peptide complex\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMain use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTired, dry or sun-aged skin; overall skin quality\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnder-eye area, eye bags and forehead lines\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLidocaine\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClinics that treat both whole-face skin quality and the eye area usually stock both.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is HP Cell made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVitaran I is a single-active product. Polynucleotides are purified DNA fragments. They bind water and are reported to support fibroblast activity and the skin's own collagen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTox \u0026amp; Eye Regation is a multi-ingredient solution. PDRN and hyaluronic acid cover repair and hydration. Pentapeptide-18 and acetyl hexapeptide are cosmetic peptides used in products aimed at expression lines. Despite the name, it contains no botulinum toxin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe concentrations above are as listed by the supplier. Check the box for the full ingredient list.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is HP Cell used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth types are for professional use. The route and technique differ by product and by source, so we do not give a protocol here. Use each product as directed in the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe supplier-listed course for Vitaran I is 3 to 4 sessions, 15 to 30 days apart, then one maintenance session every 4 to 6 months. No fixed course is published for Tox \u0026amp; Eye Regation; one box of five vials covers several sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should HP Cell be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeep both types in the original box at room temperature, away from sunlight. Do not freeze. Follow the storage range and expiry date printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying HP Cell from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. For other eye-area boosters, see \u003ca href=\"\/products\/eyebella\"\u003eEyebella\u003c\/a\u003e. For PN boosters, compare \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran\"\u003eRejuran\u003c\/a\u003e or browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eskin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use only. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHP Cell FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Vitaran I the same as Tox \u0026amp; Eye Regation?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Vitaran I is a PN gel in a syringe. Tox \u0026amp; Eye Regation is a peptide and PDRN solution in vials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Tox \u0026amp; Eye Regation contain botulinum toxin?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a peptide solution. It does not relax muscle the way a toxin does.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in the box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVitaran I: one 1 mL pre-filled syringe. Tox \u0026amp; Eye Regation: five 3 mL vials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes HP Cell contain lidocaine?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Neither type lists an anaesthetic.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan people with fish allergy use it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePN and PDRN are usually purified from fish DNA. Ask about fish allergy first and check the manufacturer's leaflet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"HP Cell","offers":[{"title":"Vitaran I","offer_id":52914205720858,"sku":null,"price":90.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Tox \u0026 Eye Regation","offer_id":52914205753626,"sku":null,"price":158.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}]},{"product_id":"mayster","title":"Mayster Skin Booster (HA \/ PDRN)","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMayster Skin Booster\u003c\/strong\u003e is a two-part skin booster from Maypharm in South Korea. Each set pairs a 100 mg freeze-dried powder with a 5 mL activator that you mix just before use. It comes in two types: \u003cstrong\u003eHA\u003c\/strong\u003e for hydration and elasticity, and \u003cstrong\u003ePDRN\u003c\/strong\u003e for skin renewal and brighter tone.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePick your type above, or \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMayster HA or PDRN — which one do you need?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose HA for dry, slack skin. Choose PDRN for dull or uneven skin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMayster HA\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMayster PDRN\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePowder\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mg hyaluronic acid powder, mixed molecular weights\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mg PDRN powder from salmon DNA\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eActivator (5 mL)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePeptide activator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrightening activator with niacinamide and glutathione\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMain concern\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDryness, loss of elasticity, fine lines\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDull tone, uneven colour, tired skin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLidocaine\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClinics that see mixed concerns often stock both and alternate them through a course.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Mayster made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMayster HA uses hyaluronic acid in several molecular weights, listed at 10,000 ppm. Hyaluronic acid binds water, which is why it is used for dry skin. Its activator adds peptides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMayster PDRN uses polydeoxyribonucleotide, a purified DNA fragment from salmon. PDRN is reported to support skin repair. Its activator adds niacinamide and glutathione, two ingredients widely used for skin tone.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Mayster prepared and used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdd the 5 mL activator to the powder vial and swirl gently until it dissolves. Do not shake hard. Use the mixed solution straight away and discard what is left.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMayster is for professional use. The route of use is described differently by different sources, so we do not give a protocol here. Use it as directed in Maypharm's instructions for use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Mayster be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeep unopened sets in the original box, away from sunlight and heat. Do not freeze. The supplier lists a shelf life of 36 months from manufacture; check the date printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Mayster from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Compare other PDRN and exosome boosters such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/kiara-reju\"\u003eKiara Reju\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/products\/hyalmass-aqua-exosome\"\u003eHyalmass Aqua Exosome\u003c\/a\u003e, or browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eKorean skin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use only. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMayster FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Mayster?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMaypharm, South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in a Mayster set?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA 100 mg powder vial and a 5 mL activator vial. Ask us about the number of sets per box when you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I store Mayster after mixing?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Mix it just before use and discard any leftover solution.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Mayster PDRN come from fish?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The PDRN is purified from salmon DNA, so ask about fish allergy first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Mayster contain lidocaine?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Neither type lists an anaesthetic.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Mayster","offers":[{"title":"HA","offer_id":52914206048538,"sku":null,"price":84.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"PDRN","offer_id":52914206081306,"sku":null,"price":84.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}]},{"product_id":"detoxione-1200-glutathione","title":"Detoxione 1200 (Glutathione)","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDetoxione 1200\u003c\/strong\u003e is a reduced glutathione injection from South Korea. Each vial holds 1200 mg of reduced glutathione as a dry powder. A box holds 10 vials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is a prescription-type injectable. This page covers composition, pack and storage. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eAsk us about trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e for volume orders.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Detoxione 1200 made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe active ingredient is reduced glutathione, 1200 mg per vial. Glutathione is a small peptide built from three amino acids: glutamate, cysteine and glycine. \"Reduced\" is the active form, before it has been oxidised. The vial holds a white powder that is dissolved just before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eItem\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eActive\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReduced glutathione 1200 mg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eForm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder for injection, in a vial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 vials per box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSouth Korea\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLuthione 600mg, Luthione 1200mg or Detoxione 1200 — which one?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose by the amount of glutathione per vial. Detoxione 1200 matches Luthione 1200mg in strength, at 1200 mg per vial. Luthione 600mg is the half-strength option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReduced glutathione per vial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaker\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/luthione-600mg\"\u003eLuthione 600mg\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDaehan New Pharm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/luthione-inj-1200mg\"\u003eLuthione 1200mg\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1200 mg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDaehan New Pharm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDetoxione 1200\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1200 mg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSouth Korea\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Detoxione 1200 used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe use is set out in the insert in the box. We do not make whitening, brightening, detox or anti-ageing claims for it. Whether it suits a patient is a decision for the prescribing clinician.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Detoxione 1200 dosed?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDosing follows the product insert and the prescribing clinician. We do not publish dose, frequency or course length for prescription-type injectables, and nothing on this page replaces the insert in the box. The diluent, its volume and the route are also set by the insert.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Detoxione 1200 be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore unopened vials at room temperature, 1–30 °C, in a sealed container. Once the powder is dissolved, use it straight away and do not keep leftover solution. Shelf life is as printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat should clinics check before use?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDo not use it in a patient with a known allergy to glutathione or any ingredient. Check that the powder is white and dry and that the seal is intact. After dissolving, the solution should be clear; discard it if it is cloudy. Follow the precautions in the insert.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Detoxione 1200 from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship Detoxione 1200 worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you place the order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e, browse our other \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/vitamins-injectables\"\u003evitamin and nutrient injectables\u003c\/a\u003e, or \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e. For reconstitution supplies see \u003ca href=\"\/products\/saline-20-ml\"\u003eSaline 20 ml\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetoxione 1200 FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much glutathione is in one vial of Detoxione 1200?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e1200 mg of reduced glutathione.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many vials are in a box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTen vials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Detoxione 1200 a liquid or a powder?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA dry powder in a vial. It is dissolved just before use, as the insert describes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is made in South Korea. The manufacturer is printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow is it dosed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDosing follows the product insert and the prescribing clinician.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Detoxione","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52914213454106,"sku":null,"price":92.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}]},{"product_id":"exoxe","title":"Exoxe","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eExoxe\u003c\/strong\u003e is a Korean two-vial exosome skin treatment for professional use. One vial holds 50 mg of freeze-dried exosome powder. The other holds 5 mL of sterile hyaluronic acid solution. You mix the two just before use and apply the solution to the skin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is used for dull, rough or tired skin, often as the finishing step after a clinic procedure. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for trade pricing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Exoxe made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExoxe is built around freeze-dried exosomes, listed at 6 billion particles per vial. Exosomes are tiny vesicles that cells release to carry signals to other cells.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePart\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eContents (as listed)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVial 1 — powder, 50 mg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFreeze-dried exosomes, 6 billion particles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVial 2 — solution, 5 mL\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSterile hyaluronic acid solution\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupporting ingredients\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e9 growth factors, 30 amino acids, 6 peptides, 6 minerals, 4 coenzymes, vitamins and retinol\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExoxe has no lidocaine and no cross-linked filler gel. It works on skin condition, not on volume or shape.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Exoxe used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExoxe is used for skin quality on the face. The listed concerns are enlarged pores, dull skin, dryness, rough texture, uneven tone and loss of firmness. It is also listed for skin that needs support after a procedure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Exoxe used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExoxe is applied to the skin surface. The listed steps are:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003col\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAdd the hyaluronic acid solution to the powder vial.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSwirl gently until the powder dissolves. Do not shake.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCleanse and dry the skin.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpread the solution evenly and let it absorb.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMany clinics apply it after microneedling or laser, when the skin takes up products more easily. We do not give an injection protocol for Exoxe. Use it only as directed in the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Exoxe be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeep both vials in the original box, away from sunlight and heat. Follow the storage temperature and expiry date printed on the box. Use the mixed solution straight away and discard what is left.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Exoxe from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Compare other exosome products such as the \u003ca href=\"\/products\/asce-derma-signal-kit\"\u003eASCE+ Derma Signal Kit\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/products\/2xsome-skin-booster\"\u003e2XSOME\u003c\/a\u003e, or browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eskin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use only. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExoxe FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many exosomes are in Exoxe?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe supplier lists 6 billion particles in the 50 mg powder vial.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Exoxe injected?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is listed for application to the skin surface. Use it only as the manufacturer's instructions direct.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan Exoxe be used after microneedling?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClinics commonly apply it after microneedling or laser. Follow the manufacturer's instructions and your clinic protocol.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Exoxe contain retinol?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, retinol is among the listed supporting ingredients. Review the ingredient list for sensitive patients.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I keep the mixed solution?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Mix it just before use and discard any leftover.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Exoxe","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52914213486874,"sku":null,"price":108.9,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}]},{"product_id":"curenex-dailycare-skinbooster","title":"Curenex Dailycare Skinbooster","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCurenex Dailycare Skinbooster\u003c\/strong\u003e is a Korean skin booster serum in a 30 mL bottle. It is applied to the skin, not injected. The formula combines salmon-derived PDRN with peptides, glutathione and hyaluronic acid. It is used for hydration, glow and a more even tone between clinic treatments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for trade pricing and current stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Curenex Dailycare made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFour ingredient groups do the work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePDRN\u003c\/strong\u003e — DNA fragments from salmon, used to support skin recovery.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePeptides\u003c\/strong\u003e — support a firmer, smoother feel.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGlutathione\u003c\/strong\u003e — an antioxidant used for brighter, more even tone.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHyaluronic acid\u003c\/strong\u003e — draws and holds water in the skin.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe full ingredient list is printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Curenex Dailycare applied?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eApply it to clean skin and pat it in. That is the whole routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003col\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCleanse the face and dry it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpread a small amount evenly over the face.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePat gently until absorbed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor a stronger effect, supplier instructions suggest microneedling before application. In a clinic, that means applying the serum right after the needling pass, following the device protocol.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhich Curenex product do you need?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDailycare is the upkeep product. The ampoule is for in-clinic treatments, and Curenex Eye is an injectable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/curenex\"\u003eCurenex Glow \u0026amp; Shine\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/curenex-eye\"\u003eCurenex Eye\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCurenex Dailycare\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mL vials, 5 per box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mL pre-filled syringe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 mL bottle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eKey ingredients\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePDRN, 15 peptides, HA, glutathione, collagen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePN 1%, HA 1%, lidocaine 0.3%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePDRN, peptides, glutathione, HA\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUsed by\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessionals, in clinic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedical injectors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApplied to the skin, clinic or home care\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMain goal\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGlow, tone, hydration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEye area, neck, hands\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDaily upkeep between treatments\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho is Curenex Dailycare for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt suits skin that is dull, dry or uneven in tone, and clients who want booster-style care without needles. Clinics also offer it as a take-home step between sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should it be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore at 1–30 °C, away from direct sunlight. Supplier information gives a shelf life of 24 months from manufacture. Check the date on the box and close the bottle after each use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Curenex Dailycare from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eskin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/peels-skincare\"\u003epeels and professional skin care\u003c\/a\u003e. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCurenex Dailycare FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Curenex Dailycare injected?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is applied to the skin and patted in.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much is in one box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne 30 mL bottle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePDRN, peptides, glutathione and hyaluronic acid.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used with microneedling?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Supplier instructions suggest microneedling before application for a stronger effect.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho should avoid it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAnyone allergic to an ingredient, including fish or salmon products, or with infected skin in the area.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Curenex","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52914213585178,"sku":null,"price":37.9,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}]},{"product_id":"hyalmass-aqua-exosome","title":"Hyalmass Aqua Exosome","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHyalmass Aqua Exosome\u003c\/strong\u003e is a Korean skin booster that combines hyaluronic acid (HA), PDRN and exosomes in one syringe. It is a professional product for hydration, elasticity and skin texture on the face. It contains no lidocaine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for trade pricing and current stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Hyalmass Aqua Exosome made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt has three active ingredients, and each has a different job.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eIngredient\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhat it is\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eJob\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHyaluronic acid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eA water-binding sugar found naturally in skin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFast hydration and glow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePDRN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePurified DNA fragments from salmon\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupports skin repair over time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExosomes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTiny vesicles that carry signals between cells\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupports skin renewal over time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExact amounts are not published in the sources we could check. See the box for the full ingredient list.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Hyalmass Aqua Exosome used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is used for dry, dull or tired skin that has lost bounce. It is a skin-quality product and does not add volume. The supplier lists it for all areas of the face except around the eyes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Hyalmass Aqua Exosome used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe supplier lists use on the skin surface and with microneedling:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOn the skin:\u003c\/strong\u003e apply to clean, disinfected skin. A derma roller or derma pen can help it absorb.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWith microneedling:\u003c\/strong\u003e spread one syringe evenly over the treatment area, about every three weeks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSome listings also mention mesotherapy as a course of three sessions, three to five weeks apart. We could not confirm an injection route with the manufacturer, so we do not give an injection protocol. Use the product only as directed in the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen do results show?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHydration and glow show quickly, because hyaluronic acid acts at once. Changes in elasticity and texture build over the following weeks and over a course of sessions. No fixed duration is published.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Hyalmass Aqua Exosome be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore sealed in a cool, dry place, away from direct sunlight. Do not freeze. Follow the storage range and expiry date printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Hyalmass Aqua Exosome from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. From the same brand, see \u003ca href=\"\/products\/hyalmass-filler\"\u003eHyalmass filler\u003c\/a\u003e. Compare other exosome products such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/exoxe\"\u003eExoxe\u003c\/a\u003e, or browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eskin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use only. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHyalmass Aqua Exosome FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in Hyalmass Aqua Exosome?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHyaluronic acid, salmon-derived PDRN and exosomes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used around the eyes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The supplier says to avoid the eye area.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it contain lidocaine?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan people with fish allergy use it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PDRN comes from salmon. Ask about fish allergy first and check the leaflet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow often is it used with microneedling?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe supplier lists one syringe about every three weeks. The treating professional sets the final plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Hyalmass","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52914213847322,"sku":null,"price":118.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}]},{"product_id":"jbp-plamon-human-placenta-extract-inj","title":"JBP Plamon (Human Placenta Extract) Inj.","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJBP Plamon (Human Placenta Extract) Inj.\u003c\/strong\u003e is a human placenta extract injection from South Korea. It comes as a pale yellow, clear liquid in 2 mL brown ampoules, with 10 ampoules in a box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eJBP Plamon is a prescription-type injectable. This page covers composition, pack and storage. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is JBP Plamon made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe active ingredient is human placenta extract. It is a mixture of water-soluble substances taken from human placenta, not a single molecule. The exact amount per ampoule and the excipients are printed on the box and in the insert — check them when your order arrives.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eItem\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eActive\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHuman placenta extract\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAppearance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePale yellow, clear liquid\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContainer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mL brown glass ampoule\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 ampoules per box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSouth Korea\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eJBP Plamon vs Melsmon and Laennec — how do they compare?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAll of these are human placenta injections, but they are different medicines. JBP Plamon and Melsmon are listed as placenta \u003cem\u003eextract\u003c\/em\u003e; Laennec is listed as placenta \u003cem\u003ehydrolysate\u003c\/em\u003e. Do not treat them as interchangeable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eActive as listed\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmount per 2 mL\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack on this site\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/melsmon\"\u003eMelsmon\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHuman placenta extract\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 ampoules\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/laennec-inj\"\u003eLaennec\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHuman placenta hydrolysate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e112 mg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mL ampoules, count as printed on the box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJBP Plamon\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHuman placenta extract\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAs printed on the box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 ampoules\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/plagensia-10a\"\u003ePlagensia 10A\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHuman placenta preparation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAs printed on the ampoule\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 ampoules, no outer box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/placein-m\"\u003ePlacein M\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHuman placenta extract\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAs printed on the box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 vials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is JBP Plamon used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTrade listings describe JBP Plamon for menopausal symptoms, given by subcutaneous injection. Confirm the indication and the route on the insert in your box. We do not make skin, brightening or anti-ageing claims for it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is JBP Plamon dosed?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDosing follows the product insert and the prescribing clinician. We do not publish dose, frequency or course length for prescription-type injectables, and nothing on this page replaces the insert in the box. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should JBP Plamon be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore JBP Plamon at room temperature, 1–30 °C, in its sealed carton and away from light. Supplier listings give a shelf life of 24 months from manufacture; always go by the date printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat should clinics know before using JBP Plamon?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis is a medicine made from human placenta. Donor screening and heat treatment lower the risk of passing on infection, but they cannot remove it completely. Explain this to the patient and obtain consent before treatment. Record the batch number in the patient file. In some countries people who have received a human placenta injection may no longer donate blood, so raise this at the consultation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying JBP Plamon from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship JBP Plamon worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you place the order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e, browse our other \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/vitamins-injectables\"\u003evitamin and nutrient injectables\u003c\/a\u003e, or \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us for trade pricing\u003c\/a\u003e. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eJBP Plamon FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is JBP Plamon?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA human placenta extract injection supplied in 2 mL brown ampoules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many ampoules are in a box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTen ampoules of 2 mL each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs JBP Plamon the same as Laennec?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. \u003ca href=\"\/products\/laennec-inj\"\u003eLaennec\u003c\/a\u003e is a placenta hydrolysate with 112 mg per ampoule. JBP Plamon is listed as a placenta extract.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes JBP Plamon need refrigeration?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is stored at room temperature, 1–30 °C, away from light.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow is JBP Plamon dosed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDosing follows the product insert and the prescribing clinician.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"JBP Plamon","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52914213880090,"sku":null,"price":91.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}]},{"product_id":"juve-face","title":"Juve Face","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJuve Face\u003c\/strong\u003e is a polynucleotide (PN) skin booster made by BNC Global in South Korea. It contains 2% PN. This listing is for a box of two 3 mL pre-filled syringes. Clinics use it to improve skin quality on the face, neck, décolleté and hands, and on stretch marks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for trade pricing and current stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eJuve Face or Juve Eyes — which one?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose Juve Face for larger areas and \u003ca href=\"\/products\/juve-eyes\"\u003eJuve Eyes\u003c\/a\u003e for the thin skin around the eyes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eJuve Face\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/juve-eyes\"\u003eJuve Eyes\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMade for\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFace, neck, décolleté, hands, stretch marks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSkin around the eyes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eActive\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolynucleotide (PN) 2%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolynucleotide (PN)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack listed\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 × 3 mL syringes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 × 2 mL syringe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaker\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"2\"\u003eBNC Global, South Korea\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Juve Face made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eJuve Face has one active ingredient: polynucleotide at 2%. PN is a chain of purified DNA fragments. The manufacturer says it stimulates collagen synthesis and tissue regeneration. Check the box for the full ingredient list, including whether an anaesthetic is present.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Juve Face used for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is used where skin quality, not volume, is the problem. The manufacturer lists effects on pore size, skin thickness, skin tone, melanin, wrinkles and sagging. It names these areas:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFace\u003c\/strong\u003e — fine lines, large pores, uneven tone\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNeck and décolleté\u003c\/strong\u003e — thin, lined skin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHands\u003c\/strong\u003e — dry, aged skin on the backs of the hands\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStretch marks\u003c\/strong\u003e — texture and elasticity\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Juve Face used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eJuve Face is injected into the skin by a trained professional. Many clinics apply a \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/anesthetics-ointments\"\u003enumbing cream\u003c\/a\u003e first, because the product is placed with many small injections. We do not publish depths or volumes for this product. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use supplied with the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow long does Juve Face last?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manufacturer states that results last up to 12 months. This describes a finished course, not one session. Changes build over weeks as the skin responds, so patients should not expect a same-day result.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Juve Face be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore Juve Face as directed on the box, in its original packaging and away from direct sunlight. Do not freeze. The shelf life is printed on the box. Check the seal and the expiry date before use. Each syringe or vial is for one patient and one session only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Juve Face from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. See other BNC Global boosters such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/syniro-pdrn\"\u003eSyniro PDRN\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/products\/elaxen-pdrn\"\u003eElaxen PDRN\u003c\/a\u003e, or browse all \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skin-boosters\"\u003eskin boosters\u003c\/a\u003e. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eJuve Face FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho makes Juve Face?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBNC Global, South Korea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in the box?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTwo 3 mL pre-filled syringes, as listed for this product. Check the pack details on the box you receive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow strong is Juve Face?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt contains 2% polynucleotide (PN).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Juve Face a filler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a skin booster. It improves skin quality and does not replace lost volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan Juve Face be used on stretch marks?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The manufacturer lists stretch marks as an application area.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I order Juve Face wholesale?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Juve","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52914213912858,"sku":null,"price":164.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}]},{"product_id":"eyebella","title":"EYEBELLA","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEyebella\u003c\/strong\u003e is a Korean polynucleotide (PN) skin booster made for the eye area. Each box holds one 2 mL pre-filled syringe with 1% PN (20 mg in 2 mL), purified from salmon DNA. Injectors use it for dark circles, fine lines and thin, tired skin under the eyes, and for overall facial skin quality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEyebella contains no lidocaine. \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003eContact us\u003c\/a\u003e for trade pricing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is Eyebella made of?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEyebella contains one active ingredient: polynucleotide at 1%. Polynucleotides are long chains of purified DNA. They bind water and are reported to support fibroblast activity and the skin's own collagen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePN does not add volume. It works on skin quality, which is why it suits the thin skin under the eye. It does not replace a tear trough filler for true hollowing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat does Eyebella treat?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEyebella is used for fine lines, crepey texture, dark circles and loss of elasticity around the eyes. The same syringe can be used across the whole face for general skin quality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow is Eyebella used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEyebella is injected superficially by a trained professional. The supplier gives two reference plans:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDark circles\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhole face\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNeedle\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30G, or a multi-needle device\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e33G, or a multi-needle device\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eVolume\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 1 mL per eye (2 mL per session)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mL for the full face\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePoints\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6–10 small points under each eye\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpread evenly over the face\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCourse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"2\"\u003e2–3 sessions, 3–4 weeks apart\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese are reference ranges only. The treating clinician decides the plan for each patient. The eye area has a dense network of vessels, so place small amounts slowly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow long does Eyebella last?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe supplier lists results of 6 to 12 months after a full course. The result builds over the 2–3 sessions and varies with age, skin condition and sun exposure. Pigment-type and vessel-type dark circles respond differently.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow should Eyebella be stored?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore between 2 and 25 °C, away from direct sunlight. Do not freeze. Shelf life is about 24 months from manufacture — check the date on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuying Eyebella from Korean Aesthetic\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe ship worldwide from Seoul to licensed practitioners, clinics and distributors. Payment is arranged with our team after you order. See our \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/shipping-policy\"\u003eshipping terms\u003c\/a\u003e. Compare other PN boosters such as \u003ca href=\"\/products\/rejuran\"\u003eRejuran\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/products\/kiara-reju\"\u003eKiara Reju\u003c\/a\u003e, or the eye-area \u003ca href=\"\/products\/hp-cell\"\u003eHP Cell\u003c\/a\u003e range. Many clinics apply a \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/anesthetics-ointments\"\u003enumbing cream\u003c\/a\u003e first. For trade pricing, \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c\/a\u003e with your quantity and destination country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor administration by trained, licensed medical professionals only.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEyebella FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is in Eyebella?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e1% polynucleotide from salmon DNA — 20 mg in a 2 mL syringe.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Eyebella contain lidocaine?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Use a topical numbing cream if needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many sessions are needed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsually 2 to 3 sessions, 3 to 4 weeks apart.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan people with fish allergy have Eyebella?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PN comes from salmon DNA. Ask about fish and seafood allergy before treatment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Eyebella fill hollow under-eyes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It improves skin quality. Hollowing from volume loss needs a filler.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Eyebella","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52914214175002,"sku":null,"price":31.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}]}],"url":"https:\/\/koreanaesthetic.com\/collections\/skin-brightening-pigmentation.oembed?page=3","provider":"Korean Aesthetic","version":"1.0","type":"link"}